advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 242
Projector CPX10WN/CPX11WN/ CPWX12WN User's Manual (detailed) Operating Guide Thank you for purchasing this projector. WARNING ►Before using this product, please read all manuals for this product. Be sure to read Safety Guide rst. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference. About this manual Various symbols are used in this manual. The meanings of these symbols are described below. WARNING This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling. CAUTION This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling. NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble. Please refer to the pages written following this symbol. NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. • The illustrations in this manual are for illustrative purposes. They may differ slightly from your projector. • The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. • The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent. Trademark acknowledgment • Mac® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. • Windows®, DirectDraw® and Direct3D® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. • VESA and DDC are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association. • HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. • Blu-ray DiscTM and Blu-rayTM are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association. All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners. 1 Read this Safety Guide first. Projector User's Manual - Safety Guide Thank you for purchasing this projector. WARNING • Before using, read these user's manuals of this projector to ensure correct usage through understanding. After reading, store them in a safe place for future reference. Incorrect handling of this product could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond normal usage defined in these manuals of this projector. NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. • The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. • The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or contents is not permitted without express written authority. About The Symbols Various symbols are used in this manual, the user’s manual and on the product itself to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to prevent property damage. The meanings of these symbols are described below. It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the contents. WARNING CAUTION This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling. This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could result possibly in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling. Typical Symbols This symbol indicates an additional warning (including cautions). An illustration is provided to clarify the contents. This symbol indicates a prohibited action. The contents will be clearly indicated in an illustration or nearby (the symbol to the left indicates that disassembly is prohibited). This symbol indicates a compulsory action. The contents will be clearly indicated in an illustration or nearby (the symbol to the left indicates that the power plug should be disconnected from the power outlet). 1 Safety Precautions WARNING Never use the projector if a problem should occur. Abnormal operations such as smoke, strange odor, no image, no sound, excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables, penetration of liquids or foreign matter, etc. can cause a fire or electrical shock. In such case, immediately turn off the power switch and then disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. After making sure that the smoke or odor has stopped, contact your dealer. Never attempt to make repairs yourself because this could be dangerous. • The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible. Disconnect the plug from the power outlet. Use special caution for children and pets. Incorrect handling could result in fire, electrical shock, injury, burn or vision problem. Use special caution in households where children and pets are present. Do not insert liquids or foreign object. Penetration of liquids or foreign objects could result in fire or electrical shock. Use special caution in households where children are present. If liquids or foreign object should enter the projector, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dealer. • Do not place the projector near water (ex. a bathroom, a beach, etc.). • Do not expose the projector to rain or moisture. Do not place the projector outdoors. • Do not place flower vases, pots, cups, cosmetics, liquids such as water, etc on or around the projector. • Do not place metals, combustibles, etc on or around the projector. • To avoid penetration of foreign objects, do not put the projector into a case or bag together with any thing except the accessories of the projector, signal cables and connectors. Never disassemble and modify. The projector contains high voltage components. Modification and/or disassembly of the projector or accessories could result in fire or electrical shock. • Never open the cabinet. • Ask your dealer to repair and clean insider. Do not give the projector any shock or impact. If the projector should be shocked and/or broken, it could result in an injury, and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock. If the projector is shocked, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dealer. Do not place the projector on an unstable surface. If the projector should be dropped and/or broken, it could result in an injury, and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock. • Do not place the projector on an unstable, slant or vibrant surface such as a wobbly or inclined stand. • Use the caster brakes placing the projector on a stand with casters. • Do not place the projector in the side up position, the lens up position or the lens down position. • In the case of a ceiling installation or the like, contact your dealer before installation. 2 Do not disassemble. Safety Precautions (continued) WARNING Be cautious of High temperatures of the projector. High temperatures are generated when the lamp is lit. It could result in fire or burn. Use special caution in households where children are present. Do not touch about the lens, air fans and ventilation openings during use or immediately after use, to prevent a burn. Take care of ventilation. • Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides and other objects such as walls. • Do not place the projector on a metallic table or anything weak in heat. • Do not place anything about the lens, air fans and ventilation openings of the projector. • Never block the air fan and ventilation openings. • Do not cover the projector with a tablecloth, etc. • Do not place the projector on a carpet or bedding. Never look through the lens or openings when the lamp is on. The powerful light could adversely affect vision. Use special caution in households where children are present. Use only the correct power cord and the correct power outlet. Incorrect power supply could result in fire or electrical shock. • Use only the correct power outlet depending on the indication on the projector and the safety standard. • The enclosed power cord must be used depending on the power outlet to be used. Be cautious of the power cord connection. Incorrect connection of the power cord could result in fire or electrical shock. • Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand. • Check that the connecting portion of the power cord is clean (with no dust), before using. Use a soft and dry cloth to clean the power plug. • Insert the power plug into a power outlet firmly. Avoid using a loose, unsound outlet or contact failure. Be sure to connect with ground wire. Connect the ground terminal of AC inlet of this unit with the ground terminal provided at the building using the correct power cord; otherwise, fire or electric shock can result. • Don’t take the core of power cord away. Surely connect the ground wire. 3 Safety Precautions (continued) WARNING Be careful in handling the light source lamp. The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp made of glass. The lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out. When the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector’s vent holes. Please carefully read the section “Lamp”. Be careful in handling the power cord and external connection cables. If you keep using a damaged the power cord or cables, it can cause a fire or electrical shock. Do not apply too much heat, pressure or tension to the power cord and cables. If the power cord or cables is damaged (exposed or broken core wires, etc.), contact your dealer. • Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the power cord and cables. Also, do not place a spread, cover, etc, over them because this could result in the inadvertent placing of heavy objects on the concealed power cord or cables. • Do not pull the power cord and cables. When connecting and disconnecting the power cord or cables, do it with your hand holding the plug or connector. • Do not place the cord near the heater. • Avoid bending the power cord sharply. • Do not attempt to work on the power cord. Be careful in handling the battery of the remote control. Incorrect handling of the battery could result in fire or personal injury. The battery may explode if not handled properly. • Keep the battery away from children and pets. If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment. • Do not allow the battery in a fire or water. • Avoid fire or high-temperature environment. • Do not hold the battery with the metallic tweezers. • Keep the battery in a dark, cool and dry play. • Do not short circuit the battery. • Do not recharge, disassemble or solder the battery. • Do not give the battery a physical impact. • Use only the battery specified in the other manual of this projector. • Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading the battery. • If you observe a leakage of the battery, wipe out the flower and then replace the battery. If the flower adheres your body or clothes, rinse well with water. • Obey the local laws on disposing the battery. 4 Safety Precautions (continued) CAUTION Be careful in moving the projector. Neglect could result in an injury or damage. • Do not move the projector during use. Before moving, disconnect the power cord and all external connections, and close the slide lens door or attach the lens cap. • Avoid any impact or shock to the projector. • Do not drag the projector. • For moving the projector, use the enclosed case or bag if provided. Do not put anything on top of the projector. Placing anything on the projector could result in loss of balance or falling, and cause an injury or damage. Use special caution in households where children are present. Do not attach anything other than specified things to the projector. Neglect could result in an injury or damage. • Some projector has a screw thread in a lens part. Do not attach anything other than specified options (such as conversion lens) to the screw thread. Avoid a smoky, humid or dusty place. Placing the projector in a smoke, a highly humid, dusty place, oily soot or corrosive gas could result in fire or electrical shock. • Do not place the projector near a smoky, humid or dusty place (ex. a smoking space, a kitchen, a beach, etc.). Do not place the projector outdoors. • Do not use a humidifier near the projector. Take care of the air filter to normal ventilate. The air filter should be cleaned periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like, internal temperature rises and could cause malfunction. The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW” or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising. • When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter, clean the air filter as soon as possible. • If the soiling will not come off the air filter, or it becomes damaged, replace the air filter. • Use the air filter of the specified type only. Please order the air filter specified in the other manual of this projector to your dealer. • When you replace the lamp, replace also the air filter. The air filter may be attached when you buy a replacement lamp for this projector. • Do not turn on the projector without air filter. Avoid a high temperature environment. The heat could have adverse influence on the cabinet of the projector and other parts. Do not place the projector, the remote control and other parts in direct sunlight or near a hot object such as heater, etc. Avoid Magnetism. Manufacture strongly recommends to avoid any magnetic contact that is not shielded or protected on or near the projector itself. (ie.,. Magnetic Security Devices, or other projector accessory that contains magnetic material that has not been provided by the manufacture etc.) Magnetic objects may cause interruption of the projector's internal mechanical performance which may interfere with cooling fans speed or stopping, and may cause the projector to completely shut down. 5 Safety Precautions (continued) CAUTION Remove the power cord for complete separation. • For safety purposes, disconnect the power cord if the projector is not to be used for prolonged periods of time. • Before cleaning, turn off and unplug the projector. Neglect could result in fire or electrical shock. Disconnect the plug from the power outlet. Ask your dealer to cleaning inside of the projector about every year. Accumulations of dust inside the projector cause result in fire or malfunction. Cleaning inside is more effective if performed before every humid periods such as rainy season. • Do not clean inside yourself because it is dangerous. NOTE Do not give the remote control any physical impact. A physical impact could cause damage or malfunction of the remote control. • Take care not to drop the remote control. • Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the remote control. Take care of the lens. • Close the slide lens door or attach the lens cap to prevent the lens surface being scratched when the projector is not used. • Do not touch the lens to prevent fog or dirt of the lens that cause deterioration of display quality. • Use commercially available lens tissue to clean the lens (used to clean cameras, eyeglasses, etc.). Be careful not to scratch the lens with hard objects. Take care of the cabinet and the remote control. Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc. • Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet and control panel of the projector and the remote control. When excessively soiled dilute a neutral detergent in water, wet and wring out the soft cloth and afterward wipe with a dry soft cloth. Do not use undiluted detergent directly. • Do not use an aerosol sprays, solvents, volatile substances or abrasive cleaner. • Before using chemical wipes, be sure to read and observe the instructions. • Do not allow long-term close contact with rubber or vinyl. About bright spots or dark spots. Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and such do not constitute or imply a machine defect. Be careful of printing of the LCD panel. If the projector continues projecting a still image, inactive images or 16:9 aspect images in case of 4:3 panel, etc., for long time, the LCD panel might possibly be printed. 6 Safety Precautions (continued) NOTE About consumables. Lamp, LCD panels, polarizors and other optical components, and air filter and cooling fans have a different lifetime in each. These parts may need to be replaced after a long usage time. • This product isn’t designed for continuous use of long time. In the case of continuous use for 6 hours or more, or use for 6 hours or more every day (even if it isn’t continuous), or repetitious use, the lifetime may be shortened, and these parts may need to be replaced even if one year has not passed since the beginning of using. • Any inclining use beyond the adjustment range explained in these user’s manuals may shorten the lifetimes of the consumables. Before turning on the power, make the projector cool down adequately. After turning the projector off, pushing the restart switch or interrupting of the power supply, make the projector cool down adequately. Operation in a high temperature state of the projector causes a damage of the electrode and un-lighting of the lamp. Avoid strong rays. Any strong ray (such as direct rays of the sun or room lighting) onto the remote control sensors could invalidate the remote control. Avoid radio interference. Any interfering radiation could cause disordered image or noises. • Avoid radio generator such as a mobile telephone, transceiver, etc. around the projector. About displaying characteristic. The display condition of the projector (such as color, contrast, etc.) depends on characteristic of the screen, because the projector uses a liquid crystal display panel. The display condition can differ from the display of CRT. • Do not use a polarized screen. It can cause red image. Turn the power on/off in right order. To prevent any trouble, turn on/off the projector in right order mentioned below unless specifying. • Power on the projector before the computer or video tape recorder. • Power off the projector after the computer or video tape recorder. Take care not to fatigue your eyes. Rest the eyes periodically. Set the sound volume at a suitable level to avoid bothering other people. • It is better to keep the volume level low and close the windows at night to protect the neighborhood environment. Connecting with notebook computer When connecting with notebook computer, set to valid the RGB external image output (setting CRT display or simultaneous display of LCD and CRT). Please read instruction manual of the notebook for more information. 7 Lamp WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, when the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector’s vent holes. About disposal of a lamp • This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put in trash. Dispose of in accord with environmental laws. For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org. (in USA) For product disposal, contact your local government agency or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada). For more information, call your dealer. Disconnect the plug from the power outlet • If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass could damage the projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling, so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself. • If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), ventilate the room well, and make sure not to breathe the gas that comes out of the projector vents, or get it in your eyes or mouth. • Before replacing the lamp, make sure the power switch is off and the power cable is not plugged in, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently. Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the lamp. • Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from above. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken. • Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose screws could result in damage or injury. • Use the lamp of the specified type only. • If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this happens, contact your local dealer or a service representative. • Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use. • Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old (used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage. 8 Regulatory Notices FCC Statement Warning This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. - Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS: This equipment complies with the requirements of FCC (Federal Communication Commission) equipment provided that the following conditions are met. Some cables have to be used with the core set. Use the accessory cable or a designated-type cable for the connection. For cables that have a core only at one end, connect the core to the projector. CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For the Customers in CANADA NOTICE: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Warranty And After-Service Unless seen any abnormal operations (mentioned with the first paragraph of WARNING in this manual), when a problem occurs with the equipment, first refer to the “Troubleshooting” section of the “Operating Guide”, and run through the suggested checks. If this does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or service company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied. 9 Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Checking the contents of package . . . 3 Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Connecting with your devices . . . . . 10 Connecting to a power supply. . . . . 15 Fastening the adapter cover . . . . . . 16 Using the security bar and slot . . . . 16 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Installing the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . 17 About the remote control signal . . . 17 Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard . . 18 Power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Turning on the power . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Turning off the power . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Adjusting the volume. . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Temporarily muting the sound . . . . . 21 Selecting an input signal . . . . . . . . . 22 Searching an input signal . . . . . . . . 23 Selecting an aspect ratio. . . . . . . . . 23 Adjusting the projector's elevator . . 24 Adjusting the zoom and focus . . . . . 24 Using the automatic adjustment feature . . . 25 Adjusting the position . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Correcting the keystone distortions . . 26 Using the magnify feature . . . . . . . . 27 Temporarily freezing the screen . . . 28 Temporarily blanking the screen . . 28 Using the menu function . . . . . . . . 29 EASY MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 ASPECT, AUTO KEYSTONE, KEYSTONE, PICTURE MODE, ECO MODE, INSTALLATION, RESET, FILTER TIME, LANGUAGE, ADVANCED MENU, EXIT PICTURE menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, GAMMA, COLOR TEMP, COLOR, TINT, SHARPNESS, MY MEMORY IMAGE menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 ASPECT, OVER SCAN, V POSITION, H POSITION, H PHASE, H SIZE, AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE INPUT menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 PROGRESSIVE, VIDEO NR, COLOR SPACE, VIDEO FORMAT, HDMI FORMAT, HDMI RANGE, COMPUTER IN, FRAME LOCK, RESOLUTION 2 AUTO KEYSTONE, KEYSTONE, AUTO ECO MODE, ECO MODE, INSTALLATION, STANDBY MODE, MONITOR OUT AUDIO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 VOLUME, SPEAKER, AUDIO SOURCE, HDMI AUDIO SCREEN menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 LANGUAGE, MENU POSITION, BLANK, START UP, MyScreen, MyScreen Lock, MESSAGE, SOURCE NAME, TEMPLATE, C.C. OPTION menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 AUTO SEARCH, AUTO KEYSTONE, DIRECT POWER ON, AUTO POWER OFF, USB TYPE B, LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME, MY BUTTON, MY SOURCE, SERVICE NETWORK menu . . . . . . . . . . . 63 WIRELESS SETUP, WIRELESS INFORMATION, WIRED SETUP, WIRED INFORMATION, PROJECTOR NAME, MY IMAGE, AMX D.D., PRESENTATION, SERVICE SECURITY menu . . . . . . . . . . . 74 SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE, MYSCREEN PASSWORD, PIN LOCK, TRANSITION DETECTOR, MY TEXT PASSWORD, MY TEXT DISPLAY, MY TEXT WRITING Presentation tools . . . . . . . . . 80 PC-LESS Presentation . . . . . . . 80 Thumbnail Mode, Full Screen Mode, Slideshow Mode, Playlist USB Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Starting USB Display, Right-Click menu, Floating menu, Options window Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Replacing the lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Cleaning and replacing the air lter . . 95 Other care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Related messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Regarding the indicator lamps . . . 100 Resetting all settings . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects . 102 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Introduction Introduction Features The projector provides you with the broad use by the following features. 9 This projector has a variety of I/O ports that supposedly cover for any business scene. The HDMI port can support various image equipment which have digital interface to get clearer pictures on a screen. 9 If you insert a USB storage device, such as a USB memory, into the USB TYPE A port and select the port as the input source, you can view images stored in the device. 9 This projector can be controlled and monitored via LAN connection. Furthermore, you can use the designated USB wireless adapter (optional) to establish wireless LAN connection. 9 This compact, lightweight projector uses a front exhaust system that keeps the user comfortable by directing hot air away from the user. Checking the contents of package Please see the Contents of package section in the User’s Manual (concise) which is a book. Your projector should come with the items shown there. Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing. WARNING ►Keep small parts away from children and pets. Take care not to put in the mouth. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment. NOTE • Keep the original packing materials, for future reshipment. Be sure to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use special caution for the lens. • The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted, moved or shaken, since a ap to control the air ow inside of the projector has moved. Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction. 3 Introduction Part names HOT! (1) (1) Lamp cover (93) (2) (3) (4) (11) The lamp unit is inside. (2) FOCUS ring (24) (3) ZOOM ring (24) (4) Control panel (5) (5) Elevator buttons (x 2) (24) (6) Elevator feet (x 2) (24) (7) Remote sensor (17) (8) Lens (97) (9) Intake vents (10) Filter cover (95) (9) (15) (10) (5) (6) (8) HOT! (12) (7) (5) The air lter and intake vent are inside. (11) Speaker (46) (12) Exhaust vent (13) AC IN (AC inlet) (15) (14) Rear panel (5) (15) Security bar (16) (16) Security slot (16) (6) (9) (13) (16) (14) WARNING ►Do not open or remove any portion of the product, unless the manuals direct it. ►Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions. ►Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product. ►Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector while the lamp is on. CAUTION ►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot. ►Do not attach anything onto the lens except the lens cover of this projector because it could damage the lens, such as melting the lens. (continued on next page) 4 Introduction Part names (continued) Control panel (1) STANDBY/ON button (19) (2) INPUT button (22, 29) (3) MENU button (29) It consists of four cursor buttons. (4) ECO button (56, 57) (5) POWER indicator (19, 100) (6) TEMP indicator (100) (7) LAMP indicator (100) (4) (1) (2) (3) (5) (6) (7) Rear panel (11 ~ 14) (1) LAN port (2) USB TYPE A port (3) HDMI port (4) USB TYPE B port (5) VIDEO port (6) S-VIDEO port (7) AUDIO IN1 port (1) (2) (3) HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A (8) AUDIO IN2 port (9) COMPUTER IN1 port (10) COMPUTER IN2 port (11) AUDIO OUT port (12) MONITOR OUT port (13) CONTROL port (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) USB TYPE B (9) COMPUTER IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO O OUT MONITOR O OUT (11) (10) (12) COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 CONTROL T (13) (continued on next page) 5 Introduction Part names (continued) Remote control (1) VIDEO button (22) (2) COMPUTER button (22) (3) SEARCH button (23) (4) STANDBY/ON button (19) (5) ASPECT button (23) (6) AUTO button (25) (7) BLANK button (28) (8) MAGNIFY - ON button (27) (9) MAGNIFY - OFF button (27) (10) MY SOURCE/DOC.CAMERA button (22, 57) (11) VOLUME - button (21) (12) PAGE UP button (18) (13) PAGE DOWN button (18) (14) VOLUME + button (21) (15) MUTE button (21) (16) FREEZE button (28) (17) MY BUTTON - 1 button (56, 57) (18) MY BUTTON - 2 button (56, 57) (19) KEYSTONE button (26) (20) POSITION button (25, 29) (21) MENU button (29) (22) ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons (29) (23) ENTER button (29) (24) ESC button (29) (25) RESET button (29) (26) Battery cover (17) 6 (2) (1) (6) (5) (16) (8) (9) (19) (17) (20) (22) (24) VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO SEARCH FREEZE PAGE UP BLANK VOLUME 㧗 DOWN OFF KEYSTONE MY BUTTON MUTE MENU POSITION ENTER ESC RESET (10) (4) (3) (7) (12) (14) (11) (13) (15) (18) (21) (23) (25) Back of the remote control (26) Setting up Setting up Install the projector according to the environment and manner the projector will be used in. For the case of installation in a special state such as ceiling mount, the specied mounting accessories (6SHFL¿FDWLRQV in the User’s Manual (concise)) and service may be required. Before installing the projector, consult your dealer about your installation. Arrangement Refer to tables T-1 and T-2 at the back of User's Manual (concise) as well as the following to determine the screen size and projection distance. The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen. a Screen size (diagonal) b Projection distance (±10%, from the projector’s end) c1 , c2 Screen height (±10%) • If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m (5250 feet) or higher, set ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH (57). Otherwise, set it to NORMAL. If the projector is used with a wrong setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside. (continued on next page) 7 Setting up Arrangement (continued) WARNING ►Install the projector where you can access the power outlet easily. If an abnormality should occur, unplug the projector urgently. Otherwise it could cause a re or electric shock. ►Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions. If the projector falls or topples over, it could result in injury or damage to the projector and the surrounding things. Using a damaged projector could result in a re and an electric shock. • Do not place the projector in unstable places, such as an inclined surface, places subject to vibration, on top of a wobbly table or cart, or a surface that is smaller than the projector. • Do not put the projector on its side, front or rear position. • Do not attach nor place anything on the projector unless otherwise specied in the manual. • Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specied by the manufacturer. Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used. • For special installation such as ceiling mounting, be sure to consult your dealer beforehand. ►'RQRWLQVWDOOWKHSURMHFWRUQHDUWKHUPDOO\FRQGXFWLYHRUÀDPPDEOH things. Such things when heated by the projector could result in a re and burns. • Do not place the projector on a metal stand. ►Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine oil, are used. Oil may harm the product, resulting in malfunction, or falling from the mounted position. ►Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet. Getting the projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause a re and an electric shock, and damage the projector. • Do not place the projector near water, such as in a bathroom, kitchen, or poolside. • Do not place the projector outdoors or by the window. • Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector. (continued on next page) 8 Setting up Arrangement (continued) CAUTION ►3ODFHWKHSURMHFWRULQDFRROSODFHZLWKVXI¿FLHQW ventilation. The projector may shutdown automatically or may malfunction if its internal temperature is too high. Using a damaged projector could result in a re and an electric shock. • Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as heaters. • Do not place the projector where the air from an air conditioner or similar unit will blow on it directly. • Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other objects such as walls. • Do not place the projector on carpet, cushions or bedding. • Do not stop up, block nor cover the projector's vent holes. Do not place anything around the projector that could be sucked in or stuck to the projector's intake vents. • Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic elds, doing so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction. ►Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place. Placing the projector in such places could cause a re, an electric shock and malfunction of the projector. • Do not place the projector near humidiers. Especially for an ultrasonic humidier, chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and could be deposited in the projector causing image degradation or other problems. NOTICE • Do not place the projector in a smoking area, kitchen, passageway or by the window. • Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector's remote sensor. • Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused. • Check and correct the setting for ALTITUDE of SERVICE in the OPTION menu according to the usage environment (57). If the projector is used with a wrong setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside. • Keep heat-sensitive things away from the projector. Otherwise, they may be damaged by the heat from the projector. 9 Setting up Connecting with your devices Before connecting the projector to a device, consult the manual of the device to conrm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare the required accessories, such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device. Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged. After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off, perform the connection, according to the following instructions. Refer to the gures in subsequent pages. Before connecting the projector to a network system, be sure to read Network Guide too. WARNING ►Use only the appropriate accessories. Otherwise it could cause a re or damage the projector and devices. • Use only the accessories specied or recommended by the projector’s manufacturer. It may be regulated under some standard. • Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories. • Do not use the damaged accessory. Be careful not to damage the accessories. Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out. CAUTION ►For a cable with a core at only one end, connect the end with the core to the projector. That may be required by EMI regulations. NOTE • Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in operation, unless that is directed in the manual of the device. Otherwise it may cause malfunction in the device or projector. • The function of some input ports can be selected according to your usage requirements. Check the reference page indicated beside each port in the following illustration. • Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port. Otherwise it may cause malfunction in the device or projector. - When connecting a connector to a port, make sure that the shape of the connector ts the port. - Tighten the screws to connect a connector equipped with screws to a port. - Use the cables with straight plugs, not L-shaped ones, as the input ports of the projector are recessed. About Plug-and-Play capability • Plug-and-Play is a system composed of a computer, its operating system and peripheral equipment (i.e. display devices). This projector is VESA DDC 2B compatible. Plug-and-Play can be used by connecting this projector to a computer that is VESA DDC (display data channel) compatible. - Take advantage of this feature by connecting a computer cable to the COMPUTER IN1 port (DDC 2B compatible). Plug-and-Play may not work properly if any other type of connection is attempted. - Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plugand-Play monitor. (continued on next page) 10 Setting up Connecting with your devices (continued) Computer HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 CONTROL NOTE • Before connecting the projector to a computer, consult the computer’s manual and check the compatibility of the signal level, the synchronization methods and the display resolution output to the projector. - Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector. - Some computers have multiple screen display modes that may include some signals which are not supported by this projector. - Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA (1600x1200), the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution before being displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and the projector panel are identical. • If you connect this projector and a notebook computer, you need output the display to an external monitor, or output simultaneously to the internal display and an external monitor. Consult the computer's manual for the setting. • Depending on the input signal, the automatic adjustment function of this projector may take some time and not function correctly. - Note that a composite sync signal or sync-on-green signal may confuse the automatic adjustment function of this projector (41). - If the automatic adjustment function does not work correctly, you may not see the dialog to set the display resolution. In such a case, use an external display device. You may be able to see the dialog and set an appropriate display resolution. (continued on next page) 11 Setting up Connecting with your devices (continued) Computer External device Access point USB wireless adapter (optional) USB storage device HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 CONTROL CAUTION ► Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to obtain the consent of the administrator of the network. ►Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive voltage. ►The designated USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required to use the wireless network function of this projector. ►Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector, be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your data (83). ►Do not use any extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the projector. Before you insert or pull out the USB wireless adapter from the projector, turn off the power of the projector and pull out the power cord’s plug from the outlet. Do not touch the USB wireless adapter while the projector is receiving AC power. ►To connect both the LAN cable and USB device to the projector, use a LAN cable that is at on the side where the plug’s wire is visible. Otherwise, both of them cannot be connected correctly, or the wire may break (malfunction). NOTE • If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port, use a USB extension cable to connect the USB storage device. (continued on next page) 12 Setting up Connecting with your devices (continued) HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT HDMI S-VIDEO OUT L R AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT L R AUDIO OUT COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 CONTROL L R AUDIO OUT Y CB/PB CR/PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VCR/DVD/Blu-ray DiscTM player NOTE • The HDMI port of this model is compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and therefore capable of displaying a video signal from HDCP compatible DVD players or the like. - The HDMI supports the following signals. Video signal : 480i@60, 480p@60, 576i@50, 576p@50, 720p@50/60, 1080i@50/60, 1080p@50/60 Audio signal : Format Linear PCM Sampling frequency 48kHz / 44.1kHz / 32kHz - This projector can be connected with another equipment that has HDMITM connector, but with some equipment the projector may not work properly, something like no video. - Be sure to use an HDMITM cable that has the HDMITM logo. - Use a Category 2-certied HDMITM cable to input 1080p@50/60 signal to the projector. - When the projector is connected with a device having DVI connector, use a DVI to HDMITM cable to connect with the HDMI input. (continued on next page) 13 Setting up Connecting with your devices (continued) Speakers Monitor (with an amplier) RGB IN HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT 14 CONTROL COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 Setting up Connecting to a power supply the connector of the power cord into the 1. Put AC IN (AC inlet) of the projector. plug the power cord’s plug into the 2. Firmly outlet. In a couple of seconds after the power supply connection, the POWER indicator will light up in steady orange. Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON function activated (53), the connection of the power supply make the projector turn on. AC IN Power cord WARNING ►Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as incorrect or faulty connections may result in re and/or electrical shock. • Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand. • Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, consult your dealer to get a new one. Never modify the power cord. • Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power cord. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible. Remove the power cord for complete separation. • Do not distribute the power supply to multiple devices. Doing so may overload the outlet and connectors, loosen the connection, or result in re, electric shock or other accidents. • Connect the ground terminal for the AC inlet of this unit to the ground terminal of the building using an appropriate power cord (bundled). NOTICE ►This product is also designed for IT power systems with a phase-tophase voltage of 220 to 240 V. 15 Setting up Fastening the adapter cover Use the supplied adapter cover to prevent the USB wireless adapter from coming off easily. 1. Loosen the screw (marked with triangle) on the bottom right of the USB TYPE A port. 1 the tab of the cover into the 2. Insert hole at the upper left of the USB 3 TYPE A port in the direction of the arrow. Align the screw holes on the projector and the cover. Then insert the screw removed from the projector into the hole and tighten the screw. 2 3. Tab WARNING ►Keep small parts away from children and pets. Take care not to put in the mouth. Security slot Using the security bar and slot A commercially available anti-theft chain or wire can be attached to the security bar on the projector. Refer to the gure to choose an anti-theft chain or wire. Also this product has the security slot for the Kensington lock. For details, see the manual of the security 12 mm tool. 18 mm 12mm 18mm 18mm Anti-theft security bar chain or wire Installation surface 18 mm 10 mm WARNING ►Do not use the security bar and slot to prevent the projector from falling down, since it is not designed for it. CAUTION ►Do not place anti-theft chain or wire near the exhaust vents. It may become too hot. NOTE • The security bar and slot is not comprehensive theft prevention measures. It is intended to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure. 16 Remote control Remote control Installing the batteries Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it. If the remote control starts to malfunction, try to replace the batteries. If you will not use the remote control for long period, remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place. Holding the hook part of the battery 1 2 3 cover, remove it. Align and insert the two AA batteries (HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL ENERGY, Part No.LR6 or R6P) according to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control. 1. 2. 3. Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place. WARNING ►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage, which could result in re, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment. • Be sure to use only the batteries specied. Do not use batteries of different types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one. • Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery. • Keep a battery away from children and pets. • Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery. • Do not place a battery in a re or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place. • If you observe battery leakage, wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery. If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately. • Obey the local laws on disposing the battery. About the remote control signal The remote control works with the projector’s remote sensor. This projector has a remote sensor on the front. The sensor senses the signal within the following range when the sensor is active: 60 degrees (30 degrees to the left and right of the sensor) within 3 meters about. 3m 30º 30º (approx.) NOTE • The remote control signal reected in the screen or the like may be available. If it is difcult to send the signal to the sensor directly, attempt to make the signal reect. • The remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector (Class 1 LED), so be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that could block the remote control’s signal to the projector. • The remote control may not work correctly if strong light (such as direct sun light) or light from an extremely close range (such as from an inverter uorescent lamp) shines on the remote sensor of the projector. Adjust the position of projector avoiding those lights. 17 Remote control Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard The accessory remote control works as a simple mouse and keyboard of the computer, when the projector’s USB TYPE B port and the computer’s type A USB port are connected and MOUSE is selected for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu (54). USB TYPE B (1) PAGE UP key: Press PAGE UP button. USB TYPE B port (2) PAGE DOWN key: Press PAGE DOWN button. (3) Mouse left button: Press ENTER button. (4) Move pointer: Use the cursor buttons ▲, ▼, ◄ and ►. (5) ESC key: Press ESC button. (6) Mouse right button: Press RESET button. VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON function could damage your equipment. While using this function, please connect this product only to a computer. Be sure to check your computer’s manuals before connecting this product to the computer. (3) AUTO FREEZE SEARCH PAGE UP 1 MY BUTTON 2 (1) BLANK VOLUME 㧗 DOWN OFF KEYSTONE NOTICE ►Improper use of the simple mouse & keyboard COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA MENU POSITION (2) MUTE (4) ENTER ESC RESET (5) NOTE When the simple mouse & keyboard function of this product does not work (6) correctly, please check the following. • When a USB cable connects this projector with a computer having a built-in pointing device (e.g. track ball) like a laptop computer, open BIOS setup menu, then select the external mouse and disable the built-in pointing device, because the built-in pointing device may have priority to this function. • Windows 95 OSR 2.1 or higher is required for this function. And also this function may not work depending on the computer’s congurations and mouse drivers. This function can work with the computer which can operate general USB mouse or keyboard. • You cannot do things like press two buttons at once (for instance, pressing two buttons at the same time to move the mouse pointer diagonally). • This function is activated only when the projector is working properly. This function is not available in any of the following cases: - While the lamp is warming up. (The POWER indicator blinks in green.) - When either USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is selected. - While displaying BLANK (47), TEMPLATE (51) or MY IMAGE (71) screen. - When any menu is displayed on the screen. - While using the cursor buttons to operate the sound or screen functions such as adjusting the sound volume, correcting the keystone, correcting the picture position and magnifying the screen. 18 Power on/off Power on/off Turning on the power STANDBY/ON button POWER indicator Make sure that the power cord is rmly and 1. correctly connected to the projector and the 2. outlet. Make sure that the POWER indicator is steady orange (100). Then remove the lens cover. Press STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control. The projection lamp will light up and POWER indicator will begin blinking in green. When the power is completely on, the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green (100). VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE SEARCH PAGE UP DOWN OFF KEYSTONE 3. 1 MY BUTTON 2 BLANK VOLUME 㧗 MUTE MENU POSITION ENTER ESC RESET To display the picture, select an input signal according to the section Selecting an input signal (22). The INITIAL SETTING Menu will be displayed by factory default upon startup. Once the INITIAL SETTING Menu is set, it will not appear until FACTORY RESET (62) is executed. If you wish to change the settings, refer to the LANGUAGE (47) and ALTITUDE (57) menu. (1) LANGUAGE: Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to select the desired language and press the ENTER button of the remote control or the INPUT button of the projector to execute. (2) ALTITUDE: Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select NORMAL for altitude below 1600 m (5250 feet), otherwise select HIGH and press the ENTER button of the remote control or the INPUT button of the projector to execute. 19 Power on/off Turning off the power the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control. 1. Press The message “Power off?” will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds. the STANDBY/ON button again while the message appears. 2. Press The projector lamp will go off, and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in 3. orange. Then POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp cooling is complete (100). Attach the lens cover, after the POWER indicator turns in steady orange. Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off. Also, do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on. Such operations might cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp. WARNING ►A strong light is emitted when the projector’s power is on. Do not look into the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through any of the projector’s openings. ►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot. NOTE • Turn the power on/off in right order. Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices. • This projector has the function that can make the projector automatically turn on/off. Please refer to the DIRECT POWER ON (53) and AUTO POWER OFF (54) items of the OPTION menu. Precaution for lens cover attachment and removal When you attach or remove the lens cover, move it vertically up and down while keeping the knob to the right as illustrated in the gure. 20 Operating Operating Adjusting the volume VOLUME +/- button the VOLUME +/VOLUME - buttons to adjust the volume. 1. Use A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the volume. If you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds. VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE SEARCH PAGE UP BLANK VOLUME 㧗 DOWN OFF MY BUTTON ● When is selected for current picture input port, the volume adjustment is disabled. Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu (46). ● Even if the projector is in the standby mode, the volume is adjustable when both of the following conditions are true: - An option other than is selected for AUDIO OUT STANDBY in the AUDIO SOURCE item of the AUDIO menu (46). - NORMAL is selected in the STANDBY MODE item of the SETUP menu (45). KEYSTONE Temporarily muting the sound MUTE button on the remote control. 1. Press A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have muted the sound. To restore the sound, press the MUTE, VOLUME + or VOLUME - button. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds. 1 2 MUTE MUTE button VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE PAGE UP DOWN OFF KEYSTONE SEARCH 1 MY BUTTON 2 BLANK VOLUME 㧗 MUTE ● When is selected for current picture input port, the sound is always muted. Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu (46). ● C.C. (Closed Caption) is automatically activated when sound is muted and an input signal containing C.C. is received. This function is available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S-VIDEO, or 480i@60 for COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2, and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C.C. menu under the SCREEN menu (52). 21 Operating Selecting an input signal INPUT button INPUT button on the projector. 1. Press Each time you press the button, the projector switches its input port from the current port as below. COMPUTER IN1 Æ COMPUTER IN2 Æ LAN VIDEO USB TYPE A S-VIDEO USB TYPE B HDMI ● While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu (53), the projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected. ● It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port. 1. Press COMPUTER button on the remote control. Each time you press the button, the projector switches its input port from the current port as below. COMPUTER button VIDEO ASPECT COMPUTER IN1 Æ COMPUTER IN2 Æ LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE SEARCH PAGE UP BLANK VOLUME 㧗 DOWN Æ OFF ● While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu, the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal is detected (53). If COMPUTER button is pressed when VIDEO, S-VIDEO or HDMI port is selected, the projector will check COMPUTER IN1 port rst. ● It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port. KEYSTONE Press VIDEO button on the remote control. 1. Each time you press the button, the projector switches its input port from the current port as below. HDMI Æ S-VIDEO Æ VIDEO 1 MY BUTTON 2 MUTE VIDEO button VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE SEARCH PAGE UP BLANK VOLUME 㧗 DOWN OFF ● While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu, the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal is detected (53). If VIDEO button is pressed when COMPUTER IN1, COMPUTER IN2, LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is selected, the projector will check HDMI port rst. KEYSTONE the MY SOURCE / DOC. CAMERA button on 1. Press the remote control. The input signal will be changed 1 2 MUTE MY SOURCE / DOC. CAMERA button into the signal you set as MY SOURCE (57). ● This function also can use for document camera. Select the input port that connected the document camera. VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE KEYSTONE SEARCH PAGE UP DOWN OFF 22 MY BUTTON 1 MY BUTTON 2 BLANK VOLUME 㧗 MUTE Operating Searching an input signal SEARCH button on the remote control. 1. Press The projector will start to check its input ports as below in SEARCH button order to nd any input signals. When an input is found, the projector will stop searching and display the image. If no signal is found, the projector will return to the state selected before the operation. VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE COMPUTER IN1 Æ COMPUTER IN2 Æ LAN VIDEO USB TYPE A PAGE UP BLANK VOLUME 㧗 DOWN OFF KEYSTONE SEARCH 1 MY BUTTON 2 MUTE S-VIDEO USB TYPE B HDMI ● While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu (53), the projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected. ● It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port. Selecting an aspect ratio ASPECT button on the remote control. 1. Press Each time you press the button, the projector switches the ASPECT button mode for aspect ratio in turn. For a computer signal CPX10WN/CPX11WN: NORMAL Æ 4:3 Æ 16:9 Æ 16:10 VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE PAGE UP DOWN OFF KEYSTONE SEARCH 1 MY BUTTON 2 BLANK VOLUME 㧗 MUTE CPWX12WN: NORMAL Æ 4:3 Æ 16:9 Æ 16:10 Æ NATIVE For an HDMITM signal CPX10WN/CPX11WN: NORMAL Æ 4:3 Æ 16:9 Æ 16:10 Æ 14:9 CPWX12WN: NORMAL Æ 4:3 Æ 16:9 Æ 16:10 Æ 14:9 Æ NATIVE For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal CPX10WN/CPX11WN: 4:3 Æ 16:9 Æ 14:9 CPWX12WN: 4:3 Æ 16:9 Æ 14:9 Æ NATIVE For an input signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port, or if there is no signal CPX10WN/CPX11WN: 4:3 (xed) CPWX12WN: 16:10 (xed) ● ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted. ● NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio setting. 23 Operating Adjusting the projector's elevator When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to the left or right, use the elevator feet to place the projector horizontally. Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to project at a suitable angle to the screen, elevating the front side of the 12° projector within 12 degrees. This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator knobs. An elevator foot is adjustable while pulling up the elevator knob on the same side as it. 1. Holding the projector, pull the elevator knobs up to loose the elevator feet. 2. Position the front side of the projector to the desired height. 3. Release the elevator knobs in order to lock the elevator feet. making sure that the elevator feet are locked, put the projector down 4. After gently. necessary, the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise 5. Ifadjustments. Hold the projector when twisting the feet. 1 5 To loose an elevator foot, pull up the elevator knob on the same side as it. To nely adjust, twist the foot. CAUTION ►Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the projector, since the projector may drop down. ►Do not tilt the projector other than elevating its front within 12 degrees using the adjuster feet. A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables, or the projector itself. Adjusting the zoom and focus 1. Use the ZOOM ring to adjust the screen size. 2. Use the FOCUS ring to focus the picture. 24 ZOOM ring FOCUS ring Operating Using the automatic adjustment feature AUTO button on the remote control. 1. Press Pressing this button performs the following. AUTO button VIDEO COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA For a computer signal The vertical position, the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted. Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting. For a video signal and s-video signal The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically. This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu (40). The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default. For a component video signal The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default. The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted. ● The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds. Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input. ● When this function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture. ● When this function is performed for a computer signal, a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen, depending on the computer model. ● The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu (57). ASPECT MAGNIFY ON AUTO FREEZE PAGE UP BLANK VOLUME 㧗 DOWN OFF KEYSTONE SEARCH 1 MY BUTTON 2 MUTE Adjusting the position POSITION button on the remote control when no menu is 1. Press indicated. The “POSITION” indication will appear on the screen. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► cursor buttons to adjust the picture position. When you want to reset the operation, press RESET button on the remote control during the operation. To complete this operation, press POSITION button again. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear POSITION button after a few seconds. ● When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video signal, some image such as an extra-line may appear at outside of the picture. ● When this function is performed on a video signal or s-video signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN in IMAGE menu (36) setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10. ● If POSITION button is pressed when a menu is indicated on screen, the displayed picture does not move its position but the menu does. ● This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port. MENU POSITION 2. ENTER ESC RESET 25 Operating Correcting the keystone distortions KEYSTONE button on the remote 1. Press control. A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in correcting the distortion. 2. Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select AUTO or MANUAL operation, and press the ► button to perform the following. (1) AUTO executes automatic vertical keystone correction. (2) MANUAL displays a dialog for keystone correction. Use the ◄/► buttons for adjustment. To close the dialog and complete this operation, press KEYSTONE button again. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds. KEYSTONE button VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE PAGE UP DOWN OFF KEYSTONE SEARCH 1 MY BUTTON 2 BLANK VOLUME 㧗 MUTE ● The menu or dialog will automatically disappear after several seconds of inactivity. Pressing the KEYSTONE button again nishes the operation and closes the menu or dialog. ● The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For some input, this function may not work well. ● When REAR / CEILING or FRONT / CEILING is selected for the INSTALLATION item in the SETUP menu, the automatic vertical keystone correction function may not work correctly if the projector screen is slanted or tilted downwards. ● When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus), this function may be excessive. This function should be used when the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus) whenever possible. ● When the projector is placed on the level (about ±4°), the automatic keystone distortion correction may not work. ● When the projector is inclined to near ±30 degree or over, this function may not work well. ● This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on (77). 26 Operating Using the magnify feature the MAGNIFY ON button on the remote control. 1. Press The picture will be magnied, and the MAGNIFY dialog will appear on the screen. When the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed for the rst time after the projector is turned on, the picture will be zoomed by 1.5 times. On the dialog, triangle marks to show each direction will be displayed. MAGNIFY ON/OFF button VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO SEARCH FREEZE BLANK VOLUME 㧗 DOWN OFF KEYSTONE PAGE UP 1 MY BUTTON 2 MUTE magnication of the projector switches in order with every press 2. ofThethedisplay MAGNIFY ON button. For computer signals, HDMITM (RGB) signals, input signals from the LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port 1.5 times Æ 2 times Æ 3 times Æ 4 times Æ 1 time For video signals, s-video signals, component video signals or HDMITM (Component) signals 1.5 times Æ 2 times Æ 1 time While the triangles are displayed on the dialog, use the ▲/▼/◄/► cursor 3. buttons to shift the magnifying area. 4. Press the MAGNIFY OFF button on the remote control to exit magnication. ● The MAGNIFY dialog will automatically disappear in several seconds with no operation. The dialog will appear again if the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed when the dialog has automatically disappeared. ● The magnication is automatically disabled when the displaying signal or its display condition is changed. ● While the magnication is active, the keystone distortion condition may vary. It will be restored when the magnication is disabled. ● Some horizontal stripes might be visible on the image while magnication is active. ● This function is not available in the following cases: - A sync signal in the range not supported is input. - There is no input signal. 27 Operating Temporarily freezing the screen 1. Press the FREEZE button on the remote control. The “FREEZE” indication will appear on the screen (however, the indication will not appear when the OFF is selected for the MESSAGE item in the SCREEN menu (49)), and the projector will go into the FREEZE mode, which the picture is frozen. To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal, press the FREEZE button again. FREEZE button VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE PAGE UP BLANK VOLUME 㧗 DOWN OFF KEYSTONE SEARCH MY BUTTON MUTE ● The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when some control buttons are pressed. ● If the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time, the LCD panel might possibly be burned in. Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE mode for too long. ● Images might appear degraded when this function is operated, but it is not a malfunction. Temporarily blanking the screen Press BLANK button on the remote control. 1. The BLANK screen will be displayed instead of the screen of input signal. Please refer to BLANK item in SCREEN menu (47). To exit from the BLANK screen and return to the input signal screen, press BLANK button again. BLANK button VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE PAGE UP BLANK VOLUME 㧗 DOWN OFF KEYSTONE SEARCH MY BUTTON MUTE ● The projector automatically exits from the BLANK mode when some control buttons are pressed. CAUTION ►If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector's lamp is on, use the BLANK function above. Taking any other action may cause the damage on the projector. NOTE • The sound is not connected with the BLANK screen function. If necessary, set the volume or mute rst. To display the BLANK screen and mute the sound at one time, use AV MUTE function (57). 28 Operating Using the menu function This projector has the following menus: PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION, NETWORK, SECURITY and EASY MENU. EASY MENU consists of functions often used, and the other menus are classied into each purpose and brought together as the ADVANCED MENU. Each of these menus is operated using the same methods. While the projector is displaying any menu, the MENU button on the projector works as the cursor buttons. The basic operations of these menus are as follows. MENU button POSITION button Cursor buttons INPUT button MENU POSITION VIDEO ENTER button ASPECT MAGNIFY ON ENTER AUTO FREEZE SEARCH PAGE UP DOWN KEYSTONE MENU button (Cursor buttons) COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA OFF 1 MY BUTTON VOLUME 㧗 MUTE ENTER RESET ESC ESC button BLANK MENU POSITION ESC 2 RESET RESET button start the MENU, press the MENU button. The MENU you last used (EASY 1. To or ADVANCED) will appear. EASY MENU has priority to appear just after powered on. EASY MENU 2. In(1)the Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to operate. If you want to change it to the ADVANCED MENU, select the ADVANCED MENU. (2) Use the ◄/► cursor buttons to operate the item. In the ADVANCED MENU (1) Use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select a menu. If you want to change it to the EASY MENU, select the EASY MENU. The items in the menu appear on the right side. (2) Press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to move the cursor to the right side. Then use the ▲/▼ cursor buttons to select an item to operate and press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to progress. The operation menu or dialog of the selected item will appear. (3) Use the buttons as instructed in the OSD to operate the item. (continued on next page) 29 Operating Using the menu function (continued) close the MENU, press the MENU button again or select EXIT and press 3. To the ◄ cursor button or ENTER button. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after about 30 seconds. ● If you want to move the menu position, use the cursor buttons after pressing the POSITION button. ● Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected, or when a certain input signal is displayed. ● When you want to reset the operation, press RESET button on the remote control during the operation. Note that some items (ex. LANGUAGE, VOLUME) cannot be reset. ● In the ADVANCED MENU, when you want to return to the previous display, press the ◄ cursor button or ESC button on the remote control. Indication in OSD (On Screen Display) The meanings of the general words on the OSD are as follows. Indication Meaning EXIT Selecting this word nishes the OSD menu. It's the same as pressing the MENU button. RETURN Selecting this word returns the menu to the previous menu. CANCEL or NO OK or YES 30 Selecting this word cancels the operation in the present menu and returns to the previous menu. Selecting this word executes the prepared function or shifts the menu to the next menu. EASY MENU EASY MENU From the EASY MENU, items shown in the table below can be performed. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons. Then perform it according to the following table. Item ASPECT AUTO KEYSTONE KEYSTONE Description Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio. See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu (36). Using the ► button executes the auto keystone function. See the AUTO KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu (43). Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion. KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu (43). See the Using the ◄/► buttons switches the picture mode. The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP settings. Choose a suitable mode according to the projected source. NORMAL Ù CINEMA Ù DYNAMIC Ù BOARD(BLACK) DAYTIME Ù WHITEBOARD Ù BOARD(GREEN) PICTURE MODE NORMAL CINEMA DYNAMIC BOARD(BLACK) BOARD(GREEN) WHITEBOARD DAYTIME GAMMA 1 DEFAULT 2 DEFAULT 3 DEFAULT 4 DEFAULT 4 DEFAULT 5 DEFAULT 6 DEFAULT COLOR TEMP 2 MID 3 LOW 1 HIGH 4 Hi-BRIGHT-1 5 Hi-BRIGHT-2 2 MID 6 Hi-BRIGHT-3 • When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs from pre-assigned modes above, the display on the menu for the PICTURE MODE is “CUSTOM”. Please refer to the GAMMA and COLOR TEMP (33, 34) items in PICTURE menu. • Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated, but it is not a malfunction. (continued on next page) 31 EASY MENU Item ECO MODE INSTALLATION Description Using the ◄/► buttons swithes the ECO MODE. See the ECO MODE item in SETUP menu (44). Pressing the ► button displays the INSTALLATION dialog. See the INSTALLATION item in SETUP menu (44). RESET Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE. A dialog is displayed for conrmation. Selecting the OK using the ► button performs resetting. FILTER TIME The usage time of the air lter is shown in the menu. Performing this item resets the lter time which counts usage time of the air lter. A dialog is displayed for conrmation. Selecting the OK using the ► button performs resetting. See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu (55). LANGUAGE Using the ◄/► buttons changes the display language. See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu (47). Press the ► or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE, ADVANCED MENU IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION, NETWORK or SECURITY. EXIT 32 Press the ◄ or ENTER button to nish the OSD menu. PICTURE menu PICTURE menu From the PICTURE menu, items shown in the table below can be performed. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table. Item BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST Description Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the brightness. Dark Ù Light Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the contrast. Weak Ù Strong Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the gamma mode. Ù Ù 6 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM Ù Ù 1 DEFAULT Ù 1 CUSTOM Ù 2 DEFAULT Ù 2 CUSTOM Ù 3 DEFAULT 6 DEFAULT Ù 5 CUSTOM Ù 5 DEFAULT Ù 4 CUSTOM Ù 4 DEFAULT To adjust CUSTOM GAMMA Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then pressing the ► button or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the mode. This function is useful when you want to change the brightness of particular tones. Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons, and adjust the level using the ▲/▼ buttons. You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button. Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as below. No pattern Ö Gray scale of 9 steps Ramp Õ Gray scale of 15 steps The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test pattern (Gray scale of 9 steps) except the darkest in the left end. If you want to adjust the 2nd tone from left end on the test pattern, use the equalizing adjustment bar “1”. The darkest tone at the left end of the test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing adjustment bar. • Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated, but it is not a malfunction. (continued on next page) 33 PICTURE menu Item Description Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the color temperature mode. 3 LOW 6 Hi-BRIGHT-3 3 CUSTOM Ù Ù Ù 6 CUSTOM Ù Ù 2 CUSTOM Ù 1 HIGH Ù 1 CUSTOM Ù 2 MID Ù 5 CUSTOM Ù 5 Hi-BRIGHT-2 Ù 4 CUSTOM Ù 4 Hi-BRIGHT-1 To adjust CUSTOM COLOR TEMP Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then pressing the ► button or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the OFFSET and GAIN of the selected mode. OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity on the whole tones of the test pattern. GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity on the brighter tones of the test pattern. Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons, and adjust the level using the ▲/▼ buttons. You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button. Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as below. No pattern Ö Gray scale of 9 steps Ramp Õ Gray scale of 15 steps • Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated, but it is not a malfunction. 34 COLOR Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the strength of whole color. Weak Ù Strong • This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component video signal. • For an HDMITM signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or (2) applies. (1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO. (2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals. TINT Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the tint. Reddish Ù Greenish • This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component video signal. • For an HDMITM signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or (2) applies. (1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO. (2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals. (continued on next page) PICTURE menu Item Description SHARPNESS Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the sharpness. Weak Ù Strong • There may be some noise and/or the screen may icker for a moment when an adjustment is made. This is not a malfunction. MY MEMORY This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data (for all the items of the PICTURE menu). Selecting a function using the ▲/▼ buttons and pressing the ► or ENTER button performs each function. SAVE-1 Ù SAVE-2 Ù SAVE-3 Ù SAVE-4 LOAD-4 ÙLOAD-3 Ù LOAD-2 Ù LOAD-1 SAVE-1, SAVE-2, SAVE-3, SAVE-4 Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into the memory linked in the number included in the function’s name. • Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be lost by saving new data into the memory. LOAD-1, LOAD-2, LOAD-3, LOAD-4 Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked in the number included in the function’s name, and adjusts the picture automatically depending on the data. • The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are skipped. • Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by loading data. If you want to keep the current adjustment, please save it before performing a LOAD function. • There may be some noise and the screen may icker for a moment when loading data. This is not malfunction. • You can perform the LOAD function using MY BUTTON. Please see MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu (56, 57). 35 IMAGE menu IMAGE menu From the IMAGE menu, items shown in the table below can be performed. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table. Item Description Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio. For a computer signal CPX10WN/CPX11WN: NORMAL Ù 4:3 Ù 16:9 Ù 16:10 CPWX12WN: NORMAL Ù 4:3 Ù 16:9 Ù 16:10 Ù NATIVE For an HDMITM signal CPX10WN/CPX11WN: NORMAL Ù 4:3 Ù 16:9 Ù 16:10 Ù 14:9 ASPECT CPWX12WN: NORMAL Ù 4:3 Ù 16:9 Ù 16:10 Ù 14:9 Ù NATIVE For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal CPX10WN/CPX11WN: 4:3 Ù 16:9 Ù 14:9 CPWX12WN: 4:3 Ù 16:9 Ù 14:9 Ù NATIVE For an input signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port, or if there is no signal CPX10WN/CPX11WN: 4:3 (xed) CPWX12WN: 16:10 (xed) • The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal. OVER SCAN Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the over-scan ratio. Small (It magnies picture) Ù Large (It reduces picture) • This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component video signal. • For an HDMITM signal, this item can also be selected if either (1) or (2) applies. (1) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO. (2) HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO, and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals. (continued on next page) 36 IMAGE menu Item Description V POSITION Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the vertical position. Down Ù Up • Over-adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on the screen. If this occurs, please reset the vertical position to the default setting. Pressing the RESET button when the V POSITION is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting. • When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN (36) setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10. • This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port. H POSITION Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the horizontal position. Right Ù Left • Over-adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on the screen. If this occurs, please reset the horizontal position to the default setting. Pressing the RESET button when the H POSITION is selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting. • When this function is performed on a video signal or an s-video signal, the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN (36) setting. It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10. • This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port. (continued on next page) 37 IMAGE menu Item Description H PHASE Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate icker. Right Ù Left • This item can be selected only for a computer signal or a component video signal. This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port. H SIZE Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the horizontal size. Small Ù Large • This item can be selected only for a computer signal. This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port. • When this adjustment is excessive, the picture may not be displayed correctly. In such a case, please reset the adjustment by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this operation. • Images might appear degraded when this function is operated, but it is not a malfunction. Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature. For a computer signal The vertical position, the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted. Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting. For a video signal and s-video signal The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically. This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu (40). The vertical position and horizontal position will be AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE automatically set to the default. For a component video signal The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default. The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted. • The automatic adjustment operation requires approx. 10 seconds. Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input. • When this function is performed for a video signal, a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture. • When this function is performed for a computer signal, a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen, depending on the computer model. • The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu (57). 38 INPUT menu INPUT menu From the INPUT menu, items shown in the table below can be performed. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table. Item Description Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the progress mode. TV Ù FILM Ù OFF PROGRESSIVE • This function works only for a video signal, s-video signal, component video signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60) and an HDMITM signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60). • When TV or FILM is selected, the screen image will be sharp. FILM adapts to the 2-3 Pull-Down conversion system. But these may cause a certain defect (for example, jagged line) of the picture for a quick moving object. In such a case, please select OFF, even though the screen image may lose sharpness. Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the noise reduction mode. HIGH Ù MID Ù LOW VIDEO NR • This function works only for a video signal, s-video signal, component video signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60) and an HDMITM signal (of 480i@60 or 576i@50 or 1080i@50/60). Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for color space. AUTO Ù RGB Ù SMPTE240 Ù REC709 Ù REC601 COLOR SPACE • This item can be selected only for a computer signal (except for signals from the LAN, USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B ports) or a component video signal. • The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode. • The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals. In such a case, it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO. (continued on next page) 39 INPUT menu Item Description VIDEO FORMAT The video format for S-VIDEO port and VIDEO port can be set. (1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the input port. (2) Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for video format. AUTO Ù NTSC Ù PAL Ù SECAM N-PAL Ù M-PAL Ù NTSC4.43 • This item is performed only for a video signal from the VIDEO port or the S-VIDEO port. • The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode. • The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals. If the picture becomes unstable (e.g. an irregular picture, lack of color), please select the mode according to the input signal. Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons switches the video format for an input from the HDMI port. AUTO Ù VIDEO Ù COMPUTER HDMI FORMAT AUTO VIDEO COMPUTER Feature automatically sets the optimum mode. sets the suitable mode for DVD signals. sets the suitable mode for computer signals. • When the COMPUTER is selected, the functions COLOR (PICTURE menu), TINT (PICTURE menu) and OVER SCAN (IMAGE menu) are unavailable. Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the digital range for input from the HDMI port. AUTO Ù NORMAL Ù ENHANCED HDMI RANGE AUTO NORMAL ENHANCED Feature automatically sets the optimum mode. sets the suitable mode for DVD signals. (16-235) sets the suitable mode for computer signals. (0-255) • If the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak, try nding a more suitable mode. (continued on next page) 40 INPUT menu Item Description COMPUTER IN The computer input signal type for COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 ports can be set. (1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the COMPUTER IN port to be set. (2) Use the ◄/► buttons to select the computer input signal type. AUTO Ù SYNC ON G OFF • Selecting the AUTO mode allows you to input a sync on G signal or component video signal from the port (11, 13). • In the AUTO mode, the picture may be distorted with certain input signals. In such a case, remove the signal connector so that no signal is received and select the SYNC ON G OFF, and then reconnect the signal. FRAME LOCK Set the frame lock function on/off for each port. (1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the input ports. (2) Use the ◄/► buttons to turn the frame lock function on/off . ON Ù OFF • This item can be performed only on a signal with a vertical frequency of 49 to 51Hz, 59 to 61 Hz. • When ON is selected, moving pictures are displayed more smoothly. (continued on next page) 41 INPUT menu 42 Item Description RESOLUTION The resolution for the COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 input signals can be set on this projector. (1) In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the ▲/▼ buttons and press the ► button. The RESOLUTION menu will be displayed. (2) In the RESOLUTION menu select the resolution you wish to display using the ▲/▼ buttons. Selecting AUTO will set a resolution appropriate to the input signal. (3) Pressing the ► or ENTER button when selecting a STANDARD resolution will automatically adjust the horizontal and STANDARD vertical positions, clock phase and ↓ horizontal size. The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog will be displayed. (4) To set a custom resolution use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the CUSTOM and the RESOLUTION_CUSTOM box will be displayed. CUSTOM Set the horizontal (HORZ) and ↓ vertical (VERT) resolutions using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons. This function may not support all resolutions. (5) Move the cursor to OK on screen and press the ► or ENTER button. The message "ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO CHANGE RESOLUTION?" appears. To save the setting, press the ► button. The horizontal and vertical positions, clock phase and horizontal size will be automatically adjusted. The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog will be displayed. (6) To revert back to the previous resolution without saving changes, move the cursor to CANCEL on screen and press the ◄ or ENTER button. The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying the previous resolution. • For some pictures, this function may not work well. SETUP menu SETUP menu From the SETUP menu, items shown in the table below can be performed. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table. Item Description Selecting this item performs the Automatic keystone distortion correction. Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone distortion due to the (forward/backward) setup angle by itself. This function will be executed only once when selected in the menu. When the slant of the projector is changed, execute this function again. • The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For some input, this function may not work well. • When REAR / CEILING or FRONT / CEILING is selected for the INSTALLATION item in the SETUP menu, this function may not AUTO KEYSTONE work correctly if the projector screen is slanted or tilted downwards. • When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus), this function may be excessive. This function should be used when the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus) whenever possible. • When the projector is placed on the level (about ±4°), this function may not work. • When the projector is inclined to near ±30 degree or over, this function may not work well. • This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on (77) . KEYSTONE Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion. Shrink the bottom of the image Ù Shrink the top of the image • The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For some input, this function may not work well. • When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus), this function may be excessive. This function should be used when the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus) whenever possible. • This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on (77). (continued on next page) 43 SETUP menu Item Description Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the AUTO ECO MODE. ON Ù OFF AUTO ECO MODE • When ON is selected, the projector will always be set to Eco mode at start-up regardless of the ECO MODE (below) setting. An OSD message “AUTO ECO MODE” will be displayed for a while when the projector starts with this function activated. Using the ◄/► buttons swithes the ECO MODE. ECO Ù INTELLIGENT ECO Ù NORMAL ECO MODE • When the ECO is selected, acoustic noise and screen brightness are reduced. • When INTELLIGENT ECO is selected, the brightness of the lamp changes according to the level of the input signal. The lamp becomes brighter when the input signal level is high and darker when the level is low. If dark images are projected continuously, the brightness of the lamp may increase to maintain its performance. • When AUTO ECO MODE (above) is set to ON, the projector will always be set to Eco mode at start-up regardless this setting. Pressing the ►button displays the dialog for changing the INSTALLATION setting. INSTALLATION Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the desired setting on the INSTALLATION dialog, and press the ENTER button of the remote control or the INPUT button of the projector to execute. If Transition Detector is ON and the INSTALLATION status is changed, the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm (77) will be displayed when the projector is restarted. (continued on next page) 44 SETUP menu Item Description STANDBY MODE Using ▲/▼ buttons switches the standby mode setting between NORMAL and SAVING. NORMAL Ù SAVING When SAVING is selected, the power consumption in the standby mode is lowered with some functional restriction as below: • When SAVING is selected, the RS-232C communication control except to turn the projector on and the network function are disabled while the projector is in the standby mode. If the COMMUNICATION TYPE in the COMMUNICATION menu is set to NETWORK BRIDGE, all of the RS-232C commands are disabled (59). • When SAVING is selected, AUDIO OUT STANDBY setting of AUDIO SOURCE (46) is invalid, and no signal is output from AUDIO OUT port in the standby mode. • When SAVING is selected, STANDBY setting of MONITOR OUT is invalid, and no signal is output from MONITOR OUT port in the standby mode. MONITOR OUT While the image signal from the input port chosen in step (1) is projected, the image signal from the input port selected in step (2) is output to MONITOR OUT port. (1) Choose a picture input port using ▲/▼ buttons. Choose STANDBY to select the picture output in the standby mode. (2) Select one of the COMPUTER IN ports using ◄/► buttons. Select OFF to disable the MONITOR OUT port for the input port or standby mode chosen in the step (1). • You cannot select COMPUTER IN2 for COMPUTER IN1, and vice versa. • If you have changed the setting of STANDBY, it applies only to the current standby mode, NORMAL or SAVING, selected under STANDBY MODE, without changing the setting of the other mode. The factory settings are as follows: - COMPUTER IN1 for the NORMAL mode of STANDBY MODE - OFF for the SAVING mode of STANDBY MODE 45 AUDIO menu AUDIO menu From the AUDIO menu, items shown in the table below can be performed. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ► cursor button or the ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table. Item Description VOLUME Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the volume. Low Ù High SPEAKER Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the built-in speaker. ON Ù OFF When OFF is selected, the built-in speaker does not work. AUDIO SOURCE While the image signal from the input port chosen in step (1) is projected, the audio signal from the input port selected in step (2) is output to both the AUDIO OUT port and built-in speaker of this projector. However, the built-in speaker does not work when SPEAKER is set to OFF. (1) Choose a picture input port using the ▲/▼ buttons. Choose AUDIO OUT STANDBY to select the sound output in the standby mode. (2) Select an audio input port or the mute icon using the ◄/► buttons. The icons indicate the following; No.1: AUDIO IN1 port No.2: AUDIO IN2 port No.3: LAN port No.4: USB TYPE B port : mutes the sound No.5: HDMI port • Audio input from port nos 3 to 5 can only be selected by each of the picture input ports. • Even if the projector is in the standby mode, cooling fans may work and make noises when the built-in speaker is in operation. • C.C. (Closed Caption) is automatically activated when is selected and an input signal containing C.C. is received. This function is available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S-VIDEO, or 480i@60 for COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2, and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C.C. menu under the SCREEN menu (52). HDMI AUDIO Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the HDMITM audio. Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one for your HDMITM audio device. 1Ù2 46 SCREEN menu SCREEN menu From the SCREEN menu, items shown in the table below can be performed. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table. Item LANGUAGE Description Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons switches the OSD (On Screen Display) language. ENGLISH Ù FRANÇAIS Ù DEUTSCH Ù ESPAÑOL (shown in the LANGUAGE dialog) Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the language setting. MENU POSITION Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts the menu position. To quit the operation, press the MENU button on the remote control or keep no operation for about 10 seconds. Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the blank screen. The blank screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature (28). It is displayed by pressing the BLANK button on the remote control. MyScreen Ù ORIGINAL Ù BLUE Ù WHITE Ù BLACK BLANK MyScreen : Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item (48). ORIGINAL : Screen preset as the standard screen. BLUE, WHITE, BLACK : Plain screens in each color. • To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes. Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the start-up screen. The start-up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an unsuitable signal is detected. MyScreen Ù ORIGINAL Ù OFF START UP MyScreen : Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item (48). ORIGINAL : Screen preset as the standard screen. OFF : Plain black screen. • To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the BLANK screen (above) after several minutes. If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL, the plain black screen is instead used. • When the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in the SECURITY menu (75), the START UP is fixed to MyScreen. (continued on next page) 47 SCREEN menu Item Description MyScreen This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP screen. Display the image you want to capture before executing the following procedure. 1. Selecting this item displays a dialog titled “MyScreen”. It will ask you if you start capturing an image from the current screen. Please wait for the target image to be displayed, and press the ENTER or INPUT button when the image is displayed. The image will freeze and the frame for capturing will appear. To stop performing, press the RESET button on the remote control. 2. Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts the frame position. Please move the frame to the position of the image which you want to use. The frame may not be able to be moved for some input signals. To start registration, press the ENTER or INPUT button on the remote control. To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog, press the RESET button on the remote control. Registration may take several minutes. When the registration is completed, the registered screen and the following message is displayed for several seconds: ³0\6FUHHQUHJLVWUDWLRQLV¿QLVKHG´ If the registration failed, the following message is displayed: ³$FDSWXULQJHUURUKDVRFFXUUHG3OHDVHWU\DJDLQ´ • This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen Lock item (49). • This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu (75). • This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN, USB TYPE A, USB TYPE B or HDMI port. (continued on next page) 48 SCREEN menu Item Description MyScreen Lock Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the MyScreen lock function. ON Ù OFF When the ON is selected, the item MyScreen is locked. Use this function for protecting the current MyScreen. • This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu (75). MESSAGE Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the message function. ON Ù OFF When the ON is selected, the following message function works. “AUTO IN PROGRESS” while automatically adjusting “NO INPUT IS DETECTED” “SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE” “INVALID SCAN FREQ.” “Searching….” while searching for the input “Detecting….” while an input signal is detected “AUTO ECO MODE” while starting up with AUTO ECO MODE The indication of the input signal displayed by changing The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changing The indication of “FREEZE” and “II” while freezing the screen by pressing the FREEZE button. The indication of the TEMPLATE displayed by changing. The indication of the ECO MODE displayed by changing. • When the OFF is selected, please remember if the picture is frozen. Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction (28). (continued on next page) 49 SCREEN menu Item SOURCE NAME Description Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it. (1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SCREEN menu to select SOURCE NAME and press the ► or ENTER button. The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed. (2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SOURCE NAME menu to select the port to be named and press the ► button. The SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed. Right side of the menu is blank until a name is specied. (3) Select an icon you would like to assign to the port in the SOURCE NAME dialog. The name assigned to the port will also be automatically switched according to your icon selection. Press the ENTER or INPUT button to determine your icon selection. (4) Select a number you would like to assign to the port along with the icon. You can select the number either from blank (no number assigned), 1, 2, 3, or 4. Then press the ENTER or INPUT button. (5) If you would like to modify the name assigned to the port, select CUSTOM NAME and press the ENTER or INPUT button. (continued on next page) (continued on next page) 50 SCREEN menu Item Description SOURCE NAME (continued) (6) The current name will be displayed on the rst line. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters. To erase 1 character at one time, press the RESET button or press the ◄ and INPUT button at the same time. Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button, 1 character or all characters will be erased. The name can be a maximum of 16 characters. (7) To change an already inserted character, press the ▲ button to move the cursor to the rst line, and use the ◄/► buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed. After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is selected. Then, follow the same procedure as described at the item (6) above. (8) To nish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous name without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button. TEMPLATE Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons switches the mode for the template screen. Press the ► cursor (or the ENTER) button to display the selected template, and press the ◄ cursor button to close the displayed screen. The last selected template is displayed when the MY BUTTON allocated to the TEMPLATE function is pressed (57). TEST PATTERN Ù DOT-LINE1 Ù DOT-LINE2 Ù DOT-LINE3 Ú Ú MAP2 Ù MAP1 Ù CIRCLE2 Ù CIRCLE1 Ù DOT-LINE4 You can turn a map upside down and scroll it horizontally when MAP1 or MAP2 is selected. To invert or scroll the map, display the guidance by pressing the RESET button on the remote three seconds or more when MAP1 or MAP2 appears. (continued on next page) 51 SCREEN menu Item Description The C.C. is the function that displays a transcript or dialog of the audio portion of a video, les or other presentation or other relevant sounds. It is required to have NTSC format video or 480i@60 format component video source supporting C.C. feature to utilize this function. It may not work properly, depending on equipment or signal source. In this case, please turn off the Closed Caption. DISPLAY Select Closed Caption DISPLAY setting from following options using ▲/▼ buttons. AUTO Ù ON Ù OFF C.C. (Closed Caption) AUTO : Closed Caption automatically displays when the volume is muted. ON : Closed Caption is on. OFF : Closed Caption is off. • The caption is not displayed when the OSD menu is active. • The Closed Caption is the function to display the dialogue, narration, and / or sound effects of a television program or other video sources. The Closed Caption availability is depending upon broadcaster and/or content. MODE Select Closed Caption MODE setting from following options using ▲/▼ buttons. CAPTIONS Ù TEXT CAPTIONS : Display Closed Caption. TEXT : Display Text data, which is for additional information such as news reports or a TV program guide. The information covers the entire screen. Not all of the C.C. program has Text information. CHANNEL Select Closed Caption CHANNEL from following options using ▲/▼ buttons. 1Ù2Ù3Ù4 1: Channel 1, primary channel / language 2: Channel 2 3: Channel 3 4: Channel 4 The channel data may vary, depending on the content. Some channel might be used for secondary language or empty. 52 OPTION menu OPTION menu From the OPTION menu, items shown in the table below can be performed. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons, and press the ► cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item, except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER TIME. Then perform it according to the following table. Item Description AUTO SEARCH Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic signal search function. ON Ù OFF When the ON is selected, detecting no signal automatically cycles through input ports in the following order. The search is started from the current port. Then when an input is found, the projector will stop searching and display the image. COMPUTER IN1 Ö COMPUTER IN2 Ö LAN Ö USB TYPE A VIDEO Õ S-VIDEO Õ HDMIÕ USB TYPE B • It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port. AUTO KEYSTONE Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic keystone function. ON Ù OFF ON : Automatic keystone distortion correction will be executed whenever changing the slant of the projector. OFF : This function is disabled. Please execute the AUTO KEYSTONE (EXECUTE) in the SETUP menu for automatic keystone distortion correction. • When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will not function properly so select the OFF. • This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on (77). DIRECT POWER ON Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the DIRECT POWER ON function. ON Ù OFF When set to the ON, the lamp in projector will be automatically turned on without the usual procedure (19), only when the projector is supplied with the power after the power was cut while the lamp was on. • This function does not work as long as the power has been supplied to the projector while the lamp is off. • After turning the lamp on by the DIRECT POWER ON function, if neither input nor operation is detected for about 30 minutes, the projector is turned off, even though the AUTO POWER OFF function (54) is disabled. (continued on next page) 53 OPTION menu Item Description Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the time to count down to automatically turn the projector off. Long (max. 99 minutes) Ù Short (min. 0 minute = DISABLE) AUTO POWER OFF USB TYPE B When the time is set to 0, the projector is not turned off automatically. When the time is set to 1 to 99, and when the passed time with no-signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time, the projector lamp will be turned off. If one of the projector's buttons or the remote control buttons is pressed or one of the commands (except get commands) is transmitted to the CONTROL port during the corresponding time, projector will not be turned off. Please refer to the section Turning off the power (20). Using the ▲/▼ buttons selects the function of USB TYPE B port. To use this function, you need to connect the USB TYPE B port of the projector and the type A USB port of a computer. MOUSE Ù USB DISPLAY MOUSE : The accessory remote control works as the simple mouse and keyboard of the computer. USB DISPLAY : The port works as an input port that receives image signals from the computer (89). • It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port. • In the following cases, a message to notify you that USB TYPE B port is not available for picture input appears together with the USB TYPE B dialog: - This setting is switched to MOUSE while a picture input from the USB TYPE B port is projected. - The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source while this setting is set to MOUSE. Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port. In this case, you cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function. Otherwise select other port for picture input. (continued on next page) 54 OPTION menu Item Description LAMP TIME The lamp time is the usage time of the lamp, counted after the last resetting. It is shown in the OPTION menu. Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button of the projector displays a dialog. To reset the lamp time, select the OK using the ► button. CANCEL Ö OK • Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp, for a suitable indication about the lamp. • For the lamp replacement, see the section Replacing the lamp (93). FILTER TIME The lter time is the usage time of the air lter, counted after the last resetting. It is shown in the OPTION menu. Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button of the projector displays a dialog. To reset the lter time, select the OK using the ► button. CANCEL Ö OK • Please reset the lter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air lter, for a suitable indication about the air lter. • For the air lter cleaning, see the section Cleaning and replacing WKHDLU¿OWHU (95). (continued on next page) 55 OPTION menu Item Description MY BUTTON This item assigns one of the following functions to the ECO button on the control panel (5) and MY BUTTON 1/2 on the remote control (6). (1) Choose a button to assign a function from ECO, MY BUTTON-1 and MY BUTTON-2. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the desired function on the menu and press the ► button. (2) Then using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons sets one of the following functions to the chosen button. Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the setting. • COMPUTER IN1: Selects the input from COMPUTER IN1 port. • COMPUTER IN2: Selects the input from COMPUTER IN2 port. • LAN: Selects input from LAN port. • USB TYPE A: Selects input from USB TYPE A port. • USB TYPE B: Selects input from USB TYPE B port. • HDMI: Selects input from HDMI port. • S-VIDEO: Selects the input from S-VIDEO port. • VIDEO: Selects the input from VIDEO port. • SLIDESHOW: Selects the input from USB TYPE A, and starts a Slideshow. • MY IMAGE: Displays the MY IMAGE menu (71). • MESSENGER: Turns the messenger text displayed on the screen on/off (Messenger Function in the Network Guide). When there is no transferred text data to display, the message ”NO MESSENGER DATA" appears. • INFORMATION: Displays SYSTEM_INFORMATION, INPUT_INFORMATION (62), WIRELESS INFORMATION (67), WIRED INFORMATION (69) or nothing. • AUTO KEYSTONE : Performs automatic keystone distortion correction (43). • MY MEMORY: Loads one of adjustment data stored (35). When more than one data are saved, the adjustment changes every time the MY BUTTON is pressed. When no data is saved in memory, the dialog "No saved data" appears. When the current adjustment is not saved to memory, the dialog as shown in the right appears. If you want to keep the current adjustment, please press the ► button to exit. Otherwise loading a data will overwrite the current adjusted condition. (continued on next page) (continued on next page) 56 OPTION menu Item Description MY BUTTON (continued) • PICTURE MODE: Changes the PICTURE MODE (31). • FILTER RESET: Displays the lter time reset conrmation dialogue (55). • TEMPLATE: Makes the template pattern selected to the TEMPLATE item (51) appear or disappear. • AV MUTE: Turns the picture and audio on/off. • RESOLUTION: Turns on/off the RESOLUTION dialog (42). • ECO MODE: Changes the ECO MODE (44). • BLANK: Turns on/off the blank function. (ECO button only) • FREEZE: Turns on/off the freeze function. (ECO button only) • VOLUME: Turns on/off the volume dialog. (ECO button only) • AUTO: Performs the automatic adjustment function. (ECO button only) MY SOURCE Using ▲/▼ buttons selects the picture input port to be selected with pressing the MY SOURCE/DOC.CAMERA button on the remote control. You can use this function not only for document cameras but also computers and other equipment. VIDEO Ù COMPUTER IN1 Ù COMPUTER IN2 Ù LAN S-VIDEO Ù HDMI Ù USB TYPE B Ù USB TYPE A Selecting this item displays the SERVICE menu. Select an item using the ▲/▼ buttons, and press the ► button or the ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item. SERVICE ALTITUDE Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the rotation speed of the cooling fans. The HIGH is the mode for use at highlands etc. If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m (5250 feet) or higher, select HIGH. Otherwise, select NORMAL. Note that the projector is noisier when the HIGH is selected. HIGH Ù NORMAL AUTO ADJUST Using the ▲/▼ buttons to select one of the mode. When the DISABLE is selected, the automatic adjustment feature is disabled. FINE Ù FAST Ù DISABLE FINE: Finer tuning including H.SIZE adjustment. FAST: Faster tuning, setting H.SIZE to prearranged data for the input signal. • Depending on conditions, such as input image, signal cable to the projector, environment around the projector, etc., the automatic adjustment may not work correctly. In such a case, please choose DISABLE to disable the automatic adjustment, and make adjustment manually. (continued on next page) 57 OPTION menu Item Description GHOST Adjust the settings using the ▲/▼ buttons to eliminate ghosting. SERVICE (continued) FILTER MESSAGE Use the ▲/▼ button to set the timer for notifying by the message when to replace the lter unit 100h Ù 200h Ù 500h Ù 1000h Ù 2000h Ù 3000h Ù 4000h Ù 5000h Ù OFF After choosing an item except OFF, the message “REMINDER *** HRS PASSED ....” will appear after the timer reaches the interval time set by this feature (99). When the OFF is chosen, the message will not appear. Utilize this feature to keep the air lter clean, setting the suitable time according to your environment of this projector. • Please take care of the lter unit periodically, even if there is no message. If the air lter becomes to be blocked by dust or other matter, the internal temperature will rise, which could cause malfunction, or reduce the lifetime of the projector. • Please be careful with the operating environment of the projector and the condition of the lter unit. KEY LOCK (1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to choose the operations control. CONTROL PANEL Ù REMOTE CONTROL (2) Use the ◄/► buttons to select ON or OFF. ON Ù OFF Selecting ON in Step 2 locks the buttons except STANDBY/ON on the operations control selected in Step 1. Selecting OFF releases the locked buttons on the operations control selected in Step 1. • Please use this function to prevent tampering or accidental operation. (continued on next page) 58 OPTION menu Item Description Selecting this item displays COMMUNICATION menu. In this menu, you can congure the serial communication settings of the projector using the CONTROL port. • Select an item using the cursor buttons ▲/▼. Then pressing the ► button opens the submenu for the setting item you selected. Or, pressing the ◄ button instead of the ► button makes the menu back to the previous one without changing the setup. Each submenu can be operated as described above. • When COMMUNICATION TYPE (below) is set to OFF, the other items in COMMUNICATION menu are invalid. • For the function of serial communication, refer to the Network Guide. SERVICE (continued) COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION TYPE Select the communication type for transmission via the CONTROL port. NETWORK BRIDGE (WIRELESS) Ú NETWORK BRIDGE (WIRED) Ú OFF NETWORK BRIDGE: Select this type, if it is required to control an external device as a network terminal, via this projector from the computer. Select WIRELESS or WIRED as your network connection mode. The CONTROL port doesn't accept RS-232C commands (Network Bridge Function in the Network Guide) OFF: Select this mode to receive RS-232C commands using the CONTROL port. • OFF is selected as the default setting. • When you select the NETWORK BRIDGE, check the item, TRANSMISSION METHOD (60). (continued on next page) 59 OPTION menu Item Description SERIAL SETTINGS Select the serial communication condition for the CONTROL port. BAUD RATE 4800bps Ù 9600bps Ù 19200bps Ù 38400bps PARITY NONE Ù ODD Ù EVEN • The BAUD RATE is xed to 19200bps and PARITY is xed NONE when the COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to OFF (59). SERVICE (continued) TRANSMISSION METHOD COMMUNICATION Select the transmission method for communication (continued) by the NETWORK BRIDGE from the CONTROL port. HALF-DUPLEX Ù FULL-DUPLEX HALF-DUPLEX: This method lets the projector make two way communication, but only one direction, either transmitting or receiving data, is allowed at a time. FULL-DUPLEX: This method lets the projector make two way communication, transmitting and receiving data at the same time. • HALF-DUPLEX is selected as the default setting. • If you select HALF-DUPLEX, check the setting of the item RESPONSE LIMIT TIME (61). (continued on next page) 60 OPTION menu Item Description RESPONSE LIMIT TIME Select the time period to wait for receiving response data from other device communicating by the NETWORK BRIDGE and the HALF-DUPLEX through the CONTROL port. OFF Ù 1s Ù 2s Ù 3s SERVICE (continued) OFF: Select this mode if it is not required to check the responses from the device that the projector COMMUNICATION sends data to. In this mode, the projector can send out data from the computer continuously. (continued) 1s /2s /3s: Select the time period to keep the projector waiting for response from the device that the projector sends data to. While waiting the response, the projector does not send out any data from the CONTROL port. • This menu is available only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE and the HALF-DUPLEX is selected for the TRANSMISSION METHOD (59, 60). • OFF is selected as the default setting. (continued on next page) 61 OPTION menu Item Description INFORMATION Selecting this item displays a dialog titled “INPUT_INFORMATION”. It shows the information about the current input. SERVICE (continued) • The “FRAME LOCK” message on the dialog means the frame lock function is working. • This item can't be selected for no signal and sync out. • When the MY TEXT DISPLAY is set to ON, the MY TEXT is displayed together with the input information in the INPUT_INFORMATION box (79). FACTORY RESET Selecting OK using the ► button performs this function. By this function, all the items in all of menus will collectively return to the initial setting. Note that the items LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME, LANGUAGE, FILTER MESSAGE, NETWORK and SECURITY settings are not reset. CANCEL Ö OK Be sure to set ALTITUDE after resetting all the settings (57). 62 NETWORK menu NETWORK menu Remember that incorrect network settings on this projector may cause trouble on the network. Be sure to consult with your network administrator before connecting to an existing access point on your network. Select “NETWORK” from the main menu to access the following functions. Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it according to the following table. See the Network Guide for details of NETWORK operation. NOTE • To use the wireless network function of this projector, the designated USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required. Do not use any extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the projector. • The projector does not allow both wireless and wired LAN to be connected to the same network. • Do not set the same network address for both wireless and wired LAN. • If you are not utilizing SNTP (Date/Time Settings in the Network Guide), then you must set the DATE AND TIME during the initial installation. • The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING. Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL (45). Item Description Selecting this item displays the WIRELESS SETUP menu for the wireless LAN. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item, and the ► or ENTER button on the remote control to perform the item. WIRELESS SETUP MODE (continued on next page) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the mode of the network communication system. Select according to the settings of your computer. ADHOC Ù INFRASTRUCTURE To save the setting, press the ► button. • When ADHOC is selected, IEEE802.11 n cannot be used. • If ADHOC is set to MODE while one of WPAPSK or WPA2-PSK is selected in ENCRYPTION, the ENCRYPTION (65) setting switches to OFF automatically. 63 NETWORK menu Item Description Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off. ON Ù OFF Select OFF when the network does not have DHCP enabled. To save the setting, press the ► button. DHCP (Dynamic Host • When the “DHCP” setting changes to “ON”, it &RQ¿JXUDWLRQ takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP Protocol) server. • Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if the projector could not obtain an IP address from server even if DHCP is “ON” WIRELESS SETUP (continued) IP ADDRESS Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP ADDRESS. This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF. • The IP ADDRESS is the number that identies this projector on the network. You cannot have two devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same network. • The IP ADDRESS “0.0.0.0” is prohibited. SUBNET MASK Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the same SUBNET MASK used by your computer. This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF. • The SUBNET MASK “0.0.0.0” is prohibited. DEFAULT GATEWAY Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the DEFAULT GATEWAY (a node on a computer network that serves as an access point to another network) address. This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF. DNS SERVER Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to input the DNS server address. The DNS server is a system to control domain names and IP addresses on the Network. TIME DIFFERENCE Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the TIME DIFFERENCE. Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT manager. Use the ► button to return to the menu after setting the TIME DIFFERENCE. • When this item is set, the same item in the WIRED SETUP menu is overwritten with the same setting (69). (continued on next page) 64 NETWORK menu Item Description DATE AND TIME Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the Year (last two digits), Month, Date, Hour and Minute. • When this item is set, the same item in the WIRED SETUP menu is overwritten with the same setting (69). • The projector will override this setting and retrieve DATE AND TIME information from the Time server when SNTP is enabled. (Date/Time Settings in the Network Guide) • This setting will be reset if the projector is turned off while STANDBY MODE in the SETUP menu is set to SAVING (45), or when the AC power is turned off. CH Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the channel of the wireless LAN to be used while MODE (63) is set to ADHOC. Select according to the settings of your computer. The channels 1 to 11 are available. To save the setting, press the ► button. • The available channels would be various depending on a country. In addition, wireless network card might be required due to the standard. • This item can only be selected when MODE is set to ADHOC. When MODE is set to INFRASTRUCTURE, the channel is automatically selected. WIRELESS SETUP (continued) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the encryption method to be used. WPA2-PSK(AES) Ù WPA2-PSK(TKIP) Ú Ú OFF WPA-PSK(AES) Ú Ú WEP 64bitÙWEP 128bitÙWPA-PSK(TKIP) ENCRYPTION To save the setting, press the ► button. • When MODE (63) is set to ADHOC, either WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK cannot be selected. • If IEEE802.11 n is used while MODE is set to INFRASTRUCTURE, TKIP and WEP are disabled. • If OFF or AES is not selected, communication will switch automatically to IEEE802.11 b/g. (continued on next page) 65 NETWORK menu Item Description Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the SSID to display the SSID menu. #1 DEFAULT Ù #2 DEFAULT Ù #3 DEFAULT #5 CUSTOM Ù #4 DEFAULT Select one of the DEFAULT (#1~#4) and press ► or ENTER button. WIRELESS SETUP (continued) (continued on next page) 66 SSID To adjust CUSTOM Press the ► or ENTER button when the # 5 CUSTOM is selected. The SSID #5 CUSTOM menu will be appeared. (1) The current SSID will be displayed on the rst line. If not yet written, the line will be blank. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters. To erase 1 character at one time, press the RESET button or press the ◄ and INPUT button at the same time. Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button, 1 character or all characters will be erased. The SSID can be input up to 32 characters. (2) To change an already inserted character, press the ▲/▼ button to move the cursor to one of the rst 2 lines, and use the ◄/► buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed. After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is selected. Then, follow the same procedure as described at the item (1) above. (3) To nish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous name without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button. NETWORK menu Item Description "Selecting this item displays the WIRELESS_INFORMATION dialog for viewing the wireless LAN settings." Use the ▲/▼ buttons to switch the page. The rst page shows the wireless LAN settings. The second and subsequent pages display the signal information of wireless LAN connection devices. WIRELESS INFORMATION • For details of PASSCODE, refer to the manual for “LiveViewer”. • Nothing (blank) is shown in the PROJECTOR NAME (70) and SSID (66) field until you setup those items. Only the first 16 characters of the PROJECTOR NAME. • IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate “0.0.0.0” in the following condition. (1) The USB wireless adapter is not inserted into the projector. (2) DHCP is ON and the projector does not get address from DHCP server. • Nothing (blank) is shown in the CH and SPEED elds if the USB wireless adapter is not inserted. • The actual performance and setting will be shown in the CH eld, instead of the setting value in the WIRELESS SETUP menu. • An icon is displayed to the left of the SSID of the device connected to the projector. (continued on next page) 67 NETWORK menu Item Description Selecting this item displays the WIRED SETUP menu for the wired LAN. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item, and the ► or ENTER button on the remote control to perform the item. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off. ON Ù OFF Select OFF when the network does not have DHCP enabled. To save the setting, press the ► DHCP (Dynamic Host button. &RQ¿JXUDWLRQ • When the “DHCP” setting changes to “ON”, it takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP Protocol) server. • Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if the projector could not obtain an IP address from server even if DHCP is “ON”. IP ADDRESS Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP ADDRESS. This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF. • The IP ADDRESS is the number that identies this projector on the network. You cannot have two devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same network. • The IP ADDRESS “0.0.0.0” is prohibited. SUBNET MASK Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the same SUBNET MASK used by your computer. This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF. • The SUBNET MASK “0.0.0.0” is prohibited. DEFAULT GATEWAY Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the DEFAULT GATEWAY (a node on a computer network that serves as an access point to another network) address. This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF. WIRED SETUP DNS SERVER (continued on next page) 68 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to input the DNS server address. The DNS server is a system to control domain names and IP addresses on the Network. NETWORK menu Item Description TIME DIFFERENCE WIRED SETUP (continued) DATE AND TIME Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the TIME DIFFERENCE. Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT manager. Use the ► button to return to the menu after setting the TIME DIFFERENCE. • When this item is set, the same item in the WIRELESS SETUP menu is overwritten with the same setting (64). Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the Year (last two digits), Month, Date, Hour and Minute. • When this item is set, the same item in the WIRELESS SETUP menu is overwritten with the same setting (65). • The projector will override this setting and retrieve DATE AND TIME information from the Time server when SNTP is enabled. (Date/Time Settings in the Network Guide) • This setting will be reset if the projector is turned off while STANDBY MODE in the SETUP menu is set to SAVING (45), or when the AC power is turned off. Selecting this item displays the WIRED INFORMATION dialog for viewing the wired LAN settings. WIRED INFORMATION • For details of PASSCODE, refer to the manual for “LiveViewer”. • Only the first 16 characters of the PROJECTOR NAME are displayed. • IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate “0.0.0.0” when DHCP is ON and the projector has not gotten address from DHCP server. (continued on next page) 69 NETWORK menu Item Description PROJECTOR NAME (1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the NETWORK menu to select the PROJECTOR NAME and press the ► button. The PROJECTOR NAME dialog will be displayed. (2) The current PROJECTOR NAME will be displayed on the rst 3 lines. Particular projector name is pre-assigned by default. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters. To erase 1 character at one time, press the RESET button or press the ◄ and INPUT button at the same time. Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and push the ENTER or INPUT button, 1 character or all characters will be erased.The PROJECTOR NAME can be input up to 64 characters. (3) To change an already inserted character, press the ▲/▼ button to move the cursor to one of the rst 3 lines, and use the ◄/► buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed. After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is selected. Then, follow the same procedure as described at the item (2) above. (4) To nish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous PROJECTOR NAME without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button. (continued on next page) 70 NETWORK menu Item Description Selecting this item displays the MY IMAGE menu. Use the application to transfer the image data. It can be downloaded from the Hitachi web site. Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item which is a still image by the MY IMAGE (My Image Function in the Network Guide) and the ► or ENTER button to display the image. • The item without image stored cannot be selected. • The image names are each displayed in 16 characters or less. MY IMAGE To switch the image displayed Use the ▲/▼ buttons. To return to the menu Press the ◄ button on the remote control. 7RHUDVHWKHLPDJHGLVSOD\HGDQGLWVVRXUFH¿OHLQWKHSURMHFWRU (1) Press the RESET button on the remote control while displaying an image to display the MY IMAGE DELETE menu. (2) Press the ► button to perform to erase. To stop erasing, press the ◄ button. AMX D.D. (AMX Device Discovery) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn the AMX Device Discovery on/off. ON Ù OFF When ON is selected, the projector can be detected by controllers of AMX connected to the same network. For the details of AMX Device Discovery, visit the AMX web site. URL: http://www.amx.com/ (as of June 2011) (continued on next page) 71 NETWORK menu Item Description Selecting this item displays the PRESENTATION menu. Use ▲/▼ buttons to select one of the following items, then press ► or ENTER button to use the function. • To use Network Presentation, an exclusive application, "LiveViewer" is required. It can be installed from the bundled application CD. You can also download the latest version and relevant information from the Hitachi website (http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com).For details of Network Presentation and instructions to install the "LiveViewer", refer to the manual for "LiveViewer". If you set a computer to the Presenter mode while its image is projected, the projector is occupied by the computer and access from any other computer is blocked. Use this function to quit the Presenter mode and QUIT allow other computers to access the projector. PRESENTER Select this item to display a dialog. MODE Press ► button to choose OK in the dialog. The Presenter mode is cancelled and a message is displayed indicating the result. • To make Presenter mode setting, use “LiveViewer”. PRESENTATION For details, refer to the manual for "LiveViewer". MULTI PC MODE (continued on next page) 72 If you set one or more computers to the Multi PC mode on “LiveViewer” and send their images to the projector, you can select the display mode on the projector from two options below. - Single PC mode: displays the image of the selected computer on full screen. - Multi PC mode: displays the images sent from up to four computers on screen that is divided into quarter sections. Select this item to display a dialog. Use the dialog to change the display mode as explained below. • To change from Multi PC mode to Single PC mode, select one of computers in the dialog using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button. Press the ► button to choose OK, and then press ENTER or INPUT again. The image for the selected computer is displayed on full screen. (continued on next page) SECURITY menu Item Description MULTI PC MODE (continued) PRESENTATION (continued) • To change from Single PC mode to Multi PC mode, press ► button to choose OK in the dialog and press the ENTER or INPUT button. The display mode is changed. • For details on how to switch the display mode to Multi PC mode on your computer, refer to the manual for “LiveViwer”. • The Presenter mode setting of the selected computer becomes valid when the display mode is changed to Single PC mode. Also, the Presenter mode setting becomes invalid when the display mode is changed to Multi PC mode, regardless the setting on the computers. For details, refer to the manual for “LiveViewer”. Selecting this item displays the user name. This function helps you identify from which computer the current image is sent. DISPLAY USER NAME • You can set user names for each computer on “LiveViwer”. For details, refer to the manual for “LiveViwer”. Executing this item restarts and initializes the network functions. Choose the NETWORK RESTART EXECUTE using the button ►. Then use the button ► to execute. SERVICE Network will be once cut off when choose restart. If DHCP is selected on, IP address may be changed. After selecting NETWORK RESTART EXECUTE, NETWORK menu may not be controlled approx. 30 seconds. 73 SECURITY menu SECURITY menu This projector is equipped with security functions. From the SECURITY menu, items shown in the table below can be performed. To use SECURITY menu: User registration is required before using the security functions. Enter to the SECURITY menu 1. Press the ► button. The ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed. 2. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the registered password. The factory default password is as follows. CPX10WN, CPX11WN: 3692 CPWX12WN: 2092 This password can be changed (below). Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER PASSWORD box and press the ► button to display the SECURITY menu. • It is strongly recommended the factory default password to be changed as soon as possible. • If an incorrect password is input, the ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed again. If incorrect password is input 3 times, the projector will turn off. Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect password is input. 3. Items shown in the table below can be performed. If you have forgotten your password (1) While the ENTER PASSWORD box is displayed, press and hold the RESET button on the remote control for about 3 seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the ► button on the projector. (2) The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed. Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will be sent after your user registration information is conrmed. • If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Inquiring Code is displayed, the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from (1). Item SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE Description (1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE and press the ► button to display the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box. (2) Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the new password. (3) Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box and press the ► button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same password again. (4) Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the ► button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box will be displayed for about 30 seconds, please make note of the password during this time. Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the projector will close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box. • Please do not forget your password. (continued on next page) 74 SECURITY menu Item Description The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image from being overwritten. 1 Turning on the MyScreen PASSWORD MyScreen PASSWORD 1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select MyScreen PASSWORD and press the ► button to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/ off menu. 1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu to select ON. The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) will be displayed. ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) 1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the password. Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) and press the ► button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same PASSWORD again. 1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the ► button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds, please make note of the password during this time. Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the projector will return to MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu. When a password is set for MyScreen: • The MyScreen registration function (and menu) will be unavailable. • The MyScreen Lock menu will be unavailable. • The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen (and the menu will be unavailable). Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of these functions. • Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD. 2 Turning off the MyScreen PASSWORD 2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu. 2-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered password and the screen will return to the ENTER PASSWORD box MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu. (large) If an incorrect PASSWORD is input, the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1. 3 If you have forgotten your password 3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on/off menu. 3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box. 3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will be sent after your user registration information is conrmed. (continued on next page) 75 SECURITY menu Item Description PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless a registered Code is input. 1 Turning on the PIN LOCK PIN LOCK 1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select PIN LOCK and press the ► button or the ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK on/off menu. 1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the PIN LOCK on/ off menu to select ON and the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed. 1-3 Input a 4 part PIN code using the ▲/▼/◄/►, COMPUTER or INPUT button. The PIN Code again box will appear. Reenter the same PIN code. This will complete the PIN code registration. • If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Enter PIN Code box or the PIN Code again box is displayed, the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from 1-1. Afterwards, anytime the projector is restarted after AC power is turned off the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed. Enter the registered PIN code. The projector can be used after entering the registered PIN code. If an incorrect PIN code is input, the Enter PIN code box will be displayed again. If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times, the projector will turn off. Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN code is input. The projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Enter PIN code box is displayed. This function will activate only when the projector is started after AC power is turned off. • Please do not forget your PIN code. 2 Turning off the PIN LOCK 2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the PIN LOCK on/off menu. 2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select OFF and the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed. Enter the registered PIN code to turn the PIN LOCK function off. If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times, the projector will turn off. 3 If you have forgotten your PIN code 3-1 While the Enter PIN code box is displayed, press and hold the RESET button for three seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the ► button on the projector. The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed. • If there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Inquiring Code is displayed, the projector will turn off. 3-2 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your PIN code will be sent after your user registration information is conrmed. (continued on next page) 76 SECURITY menu Item Description If this function is set to ON and the vertical angle of the projector or the INSTALLATION setting is different from the previous recorded setting, the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed and the input signal will not be displayed. • To display the signal again, set this function OFF. • After about 5 minutes of displaying the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm, the lamp will turn off. • Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition Detector function is on. 1 Turning on the TRANSITION DETECTOR TRANSITION DETECTOR 1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select TRANSITION DETECTOR and press the ► or the ENTER button to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu. 1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu to select ON. Selecting ON will save the setting of the current angle and the INSTALLATION setting. The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) will be displayed. 1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter a password. Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) and press the ► button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box, enter the same password again. 1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the ► button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds, please make note of the password during this time. Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or the ► button on the projector will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu. • Please do not forget your TRANSITION DETECTOR password. • This function will activate only when the projector is started after turning off the AC power. • This feature may not function properly if the projector is not in a stable position when ON is selected. 2 Turning off the TRANSITION DETECTOR 2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu. 2-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered password and the screen will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu. ENTER PASSWORD box If an incorrect password is input, the menu will (large) close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1. 3 If you have forgotten your password 3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on/off menu. 3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box. 3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code. Your password will be sent after your user registration information is conrmed. (continued on next page) 77 SECURITY menu Item Description The MY TEXT PASSWORD function can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten. When the password is set for the MY TEXT; • The MY TEXT DISPLAY menu will be unavailable, which can prohibit changing the DISPLAY setting. • The MY TEXT WRITING menu will be unavailable, which can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten. 1 Turning on the MY TEXT PASSWORD MY TEXT PASSWORD 1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT PASSWORD and press the ► button to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu. 1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu to select ON. The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) will be displayed. 1-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) password. Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box (small) and press the ► button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box, and then enter the same password again. 1-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press ► button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds, then please make note of the password during this time. Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or ► button on the projector will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu. 2 Turning off the MY TEXT PASSWORD 2-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu. 2-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). Enter the registered password and the screen will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off ENTER PASSWORD box menu. (large) If an incorrect password is input, the menu will close. If necessary, repeat the process from 2-1 3 If you have forgotten your password 3-1 Follow the procedure in 1-1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on/off menu. 3-2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box (large). The 10 digit inquiring code will be displayed inside the box. 3-3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit inquiring code. Your password will be sent after your user registration information is conrmed. (continued on next page) 78 SECURITY menu Item Description MY TEXT DISPLAY (1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT DISPLAY and press the ► or ENTER button to display the MY TEXT DISPLAY on/off menu. (2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MY TEXT DISPLAY on/off menu to select on or off. ON Ù OFF When it is set ON, the MY TEXT will be displayed on the START UP screen and the INPUT_ INFORMATION when the INFORMATION on the SERVICE menu is chosen. • This function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to the OFF. MY TEXT WRITING (1) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT WRITING and press the ► button. The MY TEXT WRITING dialog will be displayed. (2) The current MY TEXT will be displayed on the rst 3 lines. If not yet written, the lines will be blank. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters. To erase 1 character at one time, press the RESET button or press the ◄ and INPUT button at the same time. Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button, 1 character or all characters will be erased. The MY TEXT can be input up to 24 characters on each line. (3) To change an already inserted character, press the ▲/▼ button to move the cursor to one of the rst 3 lines, and use the ◄/► buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed. After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button, the character is selected. Then, follow the same procedure as described at the item (2) above. (4) To nish entering text, move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the ►, ENTER or INPUT button. To revert to the previous MY TEXT without saving changes, move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the ◄, ENTER or INPUT button. • The MY TEXT WRITING function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to OFF. 79 Presentation tools Presentation tools The projector has the following two convenient tools that enable on-screen presentations easily and quickly: - PC-LESS Presentation (below) - USB Display (89) PC-LESS Presentation The PC-LESS Presentation reads image and audio data from the storage media inserted into the USB TYPE A port and displays the image in the following modes. The PC-LESS Presentation can be started by selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source. This feature allows you to make your presentations without using your computer. - Thumbnail Mode (81) - Full Screen Mode (85) - Slideshow Mode (86) [Supported storage media] • USB memory (USB memory type, USB hard disk and USB card reader type) NOTE • USB readers (adapters) that have more than one USB slot may not work (if the adapter is acknowledged as multiple devices connected). • USB hubs may not work. • USB devices with security software may not work. • Be careful when inserting or removing a USB device. (12, 83) [Supported format] • FAT12, FAT16 and FAT32 NOTE • NTFS is not supported. 80 Presentation tools PC-LESS Presentation (continued) >6XSSRUWHG¿OHIRUPDWDQGLWVH[WHQVLRQ@ • JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg) * Progressive is not supported. • Bitmap (.bmp) * 16bit mode and compressed bitmap is not supported. • PNG (.png) * Interlace PNG is not supported. • GIF (.gif) NOTE • Files with a resolution larger than the following are not supported. CPX10WN, CPX11WN: 1024 x 768 CPWX12WN: 1280 x 800 (* Some computers may not support 1280 x 800.) • Files with a resolution smaller than 36x36 are not supported. • Files with a resolution smaller than 100x100 may not be displayed. • Some supported les may not be displayed. • Only a frame appears when the content of image data cannot be displayed in the Thumbnail mode. • Even with the le format and audio format combinations described above, playback of some les may fail. Thumbnail Mode The Thumbnail mode displays the images stored in a USB storage device on the Thumbnail screen. Maximum 20 images are displayed in a screen. If you wish, you can jump into the Full Screen mode or Slideshow mode, after you select some images in the Thumbnail mode. The Thumbnail mode will be started as the primary function of the PC-LESS Presentation after selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source. Selected image Thumbnail menu Thumbnail images 81 Presentation tools PC-LESS Presentation (continued) Operating by buttons or keys You can control the images on the Thumbnail screen with the remote control, control panel or Web Remote Control. The following functions can be supported while the Thumbnail is displayed. Button operation Functions The remote control Control panel Web Remote Control ▲/▼/◄/► ▲/▼/◄/► [▲]/[▼]/[◄]/[►] Moves cursor. PAGE UP PAGE DOWN - [PAGE UP] [PAGE DOWN] Switches pages. [ENTER] • Displays the selected image on the Full Screen mode when a cursor is on a thumbnail image. • Displays the SETUP menu (below) for the selected image when a cursor is on a thumbnail image number. ENTER INPUT The SETUP menu for the selected image Item SETUP 82 Functions Use the ◄/► cursor buttons to switch each setting or use the ► cursor button to execute the functions as follows. RETURN Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail screen. START Switch to ON to set the selected image as the rst image in the Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist. txt” le (88). STOP Switch to ON to set the selected image as the last image in the Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist. txt” le (88). SKIP Switch to ON to skip the selected image in the Slideshow. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.txt” le (88). ROTATE Press the ► cursor or ENTER button to rotate the selected still image 90 degrees clockwise. This setting information will be saved in the “playlist.txt” le (88). Presentation tools PC-LESS Presentation (continued) Operating by the menu on the Thumbnail screen You can also control the images by using the menu on the Thumbnail screen. Item Functions Moves to an upper folder. SORT RETURN Allows you to sort les and folders as following. Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail screen. NAME UP Sorts in ascending order by le name. NAME DOWN Sorts in descending order by le name. DATE UP Sorts in ascending order by le date. DATE DOWN Sorts in descending order.by le date. ▲/▼ Go to previous / next page. SLIDESHOW Congures and starts the Slideshow (86). RETURN Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail screen. PLAY Press the ► cursor button or ENTER to start the Slideshow. START Sets the beginning number of the Slideshow. STOP Sets the end number of the Slideshow. INTERVAL Sets the interval time of displaying still images during the Slideshow. PLAY MODE Selects the Slideshow mode. INPUT Switches the input port. MENU Displays the menu. REMOVE USB Be sure to use this function before removing USB storage device from the projector. After that, the projector will not recognize a USB storage device until you insert it again into the USB TYPE A input port. 83 Presentation tools PC-LESS Presentation (continued) NOTE • These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed. • The Thumbnail mode is able to display up to 20 les in one page. • It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen is displayed. • Some error icons will be displayed in the Thumbnail. This le seems to be broken or not supported format. A le that cannot be displayed on the thumbnail screen is indicated by a le format icon. 84 Presentation tools PC-LESS Presentation (continued) Full Screen Mode The Full Screen mode shows a full display image. To display in Full Screen mode, select an image in the Thumbnail screen. Then press the ENTER button on the remote control, the INPUT button on the control panel or click [ENTER] on the Web Remote Control. Full screen display Operations for still images The following operations are enabled in the Full Screen mode while a still image is displayed. Button operation Functions The remote control Control panel Web Remote Control ▼ ► or PAGE DOWN ▼ or ► [▼] [►] or [PAGE DOWN] Shows the next le. ▲ ◄ or PAGE UP ▲ or ◄ [▲] [◄] or [PAGE UP] Shows the previous le. ENTER INPUT [ENTER] Displays Thumbnail. 85 Presentation tools PC-LESS Presentation (continued) Slideshow Mode The Slideshow mode displays images in full screen and switches the images at intervals set in INTERVAL on the Thumbnail screen menu (83). You can start this function from the Slideshow menu. To display the Slideshow menu, select the SLIDESHOW button in the Thumbnail mode and press the ENTER button on the remote control, INPUT button on the control panel, or click [ENTER] on the Web Remote Control. While the Slideshow is displayed, the following button operations are enabled when still images are displayed, and the same button operations in the Full Screen mode are enabled when movies are displayed. Button operation The remote control Control panel Web Remote Control ENTER INPUT [ENTER] Functions Displays thumbnail. NOTE • These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed. • It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen, Slideshow, or Full Screen is displayed. • When the Slideshow mode is set to ONE TIME and the last le is a still image, the last slide of the presentation will remain displayed until the ENTER button on the remote control or Web Remote Control, or the INPUT button on the control panel is pressed. 86 Presentation tools PC-LESS Presentation (continued) You can play the Slideshow at your desired conguration. Congure the Slideshow items in the Thumbnail. 1) RETURN : Returns to the thumbnail mode. 2) PLAY : Play the Slideshow. 3) START : Set the beginning number of the Slideshow. 4) STOP : Set the end number of the Slideshow. 5) INTERVAL : Sets the interval time for displaying still images during the Slideshow. It is not recommend to set the interval time very short something like several seconds, because it may take more than several seconds to read and display an image le if it is stored in very deep layer directory or if so many les are stored in the same directory. 6) PLAY MODE : Select the Slideshow mode. ONE TIME : Play the Slideshow one time. ENDLESS : Play the Slideshow endless. NOTE • The settings of the Slideshow are saved to the ³SOD\OLVWW[W´ le that is stored in the storage media. If the le is not existed, it is generated automatically. • The settings for the START, STOP, INTERVAL, and PLAY MODE are saved to the Playlist. • If the storage media is under the write protection or the ³SOD\OLVWW[W´ is the read only type le, it is impossible to change the settings of the Slideshow. 87 Presentation tools PC-LESS Presentation (continued) Playlist The Playlist is a DOS format text le, which decides the order of displayed still image les in the Thumbnail or Slideshow. The playlist le name is “playlist.txt” and it can be edited on a computer. It is created in the folder that contains the selected image les when the PC-LESS Presentation is started or the Slideshow is congured. [Example of “playlist.txt”¿OHV@ START setting : STOP setting : INTERVAL setting : PLAY MODE setting : img001.jpg: : : : img002.jpg:600: : : img003.jpg:700:rot1: : img004.jpg: : :SKIP: img005.jpg:1000:rot2:SKIP: The “playlist.txt” le contains the following information. Each piece of information requires to be separated by “:”, and “:” at the end of each line. 1st line: START, STOP, INTERVAL and PLAY MODE settings (87). 2nd line and after: le name, interval time, rotation setting and skip setting. interval time: It can be set from 0 to 999900 (ms) with an increment of 100 (ms). rotation setting: “rot1” means a rotation at 90 degrees clockwise; “rot2” and “rot3” increase another 90 degrees in order. skip setting: “SKIP” means that the image will not be displayed in the Slideshow. NOTE • The maximum length in a line on the "playlist.txt" le is 255 characters including linefeed. If any line exceeds the limit, the "playlist.txt" le becomes invalid. • Up to 999 les can be registered to the Playlist. However, if some folders exist in the same directory the limit number is decreased by the number of folders. Any les over the limit will not be shown in the Slideshow. • If the storage device is protected or does not have sufcient space, the “playlist.txt” le cannot be created. • For the Slideshow settings, refer to the section Slideshow Mode (86). 88 Presentation tools USB Display The projector can display images transferred from a computer via an USB cable (11). Hardware and software requirement for computer • OS: One of the following. (32 bit version only) Windows ® XP Home Edition /Professional Edition Windows Vista ® Home Basic /Home Premium /Business /Ultimate /Enterprise Windows ® 7 Starter /Home Basic /Home Premium /Professional / Ultimate / Enterprise • CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher) • Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher • Memory: 512 MB or higher • Hard disk space: 30 MB or higher • USB Port • USB cable : 1 piece Starting USB Display Select the USB DISPLAY for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu. When you connect your computer to the USB TYPE B port on the projector using a USB cable, the projector will be recognized as a CD-ROM drive on your computer. Then, the software in the projector, “LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe”, will run automatically and the application, “LiveViewer Lite for USB”, will be ready on your computer for the USB Display. The application, “LiveViewer Lite for USB”, will close automatically when the USB cable is unplugged. However, it may remain displayed at times. NOTE • If the software does not start automatically (this is typically because CD-ROM autorun is disabled on your OS), follow the instructions below. (1) Click on the [Start] button on the toolbar and select the “Run” (2) Enter F:\LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe and then press the [OK] If your CD-ROM drive is not drive F on your computer, you will need to replace F with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD-ROM drive. • CD-ROM autorun is disabled while the screen saver is running. • The image transmission from the computer is suspended while the passwordprotected screen saver is running. To resume the transmission, exit the screen saver. • If "Waiting for connection." remains displayed while the USB cable is connected, remove the USB cable and reconnect after a while. • Check our web site for the latest version of the software and its manual. (User's Manual (concise)) Follow the instructions that can be obtained at the site for updating. (continued on next page) 89 Presentation tools USB Display (continued) This application will appear in the Windows notication area once it starts. You can quit the application from your computer by selecting “Quit” on the menu. NOTE • The “LiveViewer” (refer to the Network Guide) and this application cannot be used at the same time. If you connect your computer to the projector by using a USB cable while the “LiveViewer” is running, the following message will be displayed. • Depending on the software installed on your computer, images on your computer cannot be transferred using “LiveViewer Lite for USB”. • If any application software having the rewall function is installed into your computer, make the rwall function invalid with following the user's manual. • Some security software may block image transmission. Please change the security software setting to allow the use of "LiveViewer Lite for USB". • When the audio input from USB TYPE B (46) is selected, if the sound level is still low even after raising the volume level in the projector to the maximum, check whether your computer outputs audio and raise the volume level accordingly. • If the computer in use is equipped with HDMI port, the audio setting will be changed and sound interruption or noise may occur when the HDMI cable is connected or disconnected during USB Display. Restart USB Display for this case. • Image distortion or sound interruption may occur when “LiveViewer” is connected to LAN (wireless or wired) during USB Display. The above decline in performance is noticeable especially when multiple computers are connected to “LiveViewer”. 90 Presentation tools USB Display (continued) Right-Click menu The menu shown in the right will be displayed when you right-click the application icon in the Windows notication area. Display : The Floating menu is displayed, and the icon disappears from the Windows notication area. Quit : The application is closed, and the icon disappears from the Windows notication area. NOTE • If you wish to restart the application, you need to unplug the USB cable and plug it again. Floating menu If you select “Display” on the Right-Click menu, the Floating menu shown in the right will appear on your computer screen. . $ / 1 . Start capture button The transmission to the projector is started 3 and the images will be displayed. 3 Stop button The image transmission is stopped. $ Hold button The image on the projector’s screen is temporally frozen. The last image before the button is clicked is remained on the screen. You can revise the image data on your computer without showing it on the projector's screen. / Option button The Options window is displayed. 1 Minimize button The Floating menu is closed, and the icon reappears in the Windows notication area. NOTE • If you click the Start capture button and/or Stop button repeatedly, images may not be displayed on the screen. 91 Presentation tools USB Display (continued) Options window If you select the Option button on the Floating menu, the Options window is displayed. Optimize Performance The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” captures screenshots in JPEG data and sends them to the projector. The “LiveViewer Lite for USB” has two options that have different compression rate of JPEG data. Transmission speed Speed takes priority over Image quality. It makes JPEG compression rate higher. The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the transferred data is smaller, but the image quality is worse. Image quality Image quality takes priority over Speed. It makes JPEG compression rate lower. The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred data is larger, but the image quality is better. Keep PC resolution If you remove the check mark from the [Keep PC resolution] box, the screen resolution of your computer will be switched as follows, and the display speed may be faster. CPX10WN, CPX11WN: 1024 x 768 (XGA) CPWX12WN: 1280 x 800 If your computer does not support the display resolution specied above, a smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported by the computer will be selected. Sound Turns the sound on/off. The image quality may deteriorate when you play back audio data transferred together with the image data. To give priority to the image quality, turn off the sound by selecting the checkbox. About The version information of the “LiveViewer Lite for USB”. NOTE • When the resolution is changed, the arrangement of icons on computer desktop screen may be changed. • If one of the AUDIO IN ports is selected or is selected for USB TYPE B in AUDIO SOURCE of the AUDIO menu (46), audio sound operation in the Options window will be disabled. 92 Maintenance Maintenance Replacing the lamp A lamp has nite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare a new lamp, make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number. Type number : DT01191 Lamp cover Replacing the lamp Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes. Prepare a new lamp. If the projector is mounted on a ceiling, or if the lamp has broken, also ask the dealer to replace the lamp. 1. 2. In case of replacement by yourself, follow the following procedure. 3. 4. 5. 6. Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the side to remove it. Loosen the 2 screws (marked by arrow) of the lamp, and slowly pick up the lamp by the handle. Never loosen any other screws. Insert the new lamp, and retighten rmly the 2 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous process to lock it in place. While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover and the projector together, slide the lamp cover back in place. Then rmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover. 3 4 3 5 Handle 7. Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using 6 the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu. (1) Press the MENU button to display a menu. (2) Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. (3) Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. (4) Point at the LAMP TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A dialog will appear. (5) Press the ► button to select “OK” on the dialog. It performs resetting the lamp time. CAUTION is taken out. ►Do not touch any inner space of the projector, while the lamp NOTE • Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp, for a suitable indication about the lamp. 93 Maintenance Replacing the lamp (continued) Lamp warning HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE WARNING ►The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, if the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to y into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury and dust containing ne particles of glass to escape from the projector’s vent holes. ►About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws. • For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org (in the US). • For product disposal, consult your local government agency or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada). For more information, call your dealer. Disconnect the plug from the power outlet 94 • If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass could damage the projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling, so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself. • If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), ventilate the room well, and make sure not to inhale the gas or ne particles that come out from the projector's vent holes, and not to get them into your eyes or mouth. • Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently. Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the lamp. • Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws. • Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from a ceiling. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken. • Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose screws could result in damage or injury. • Use only the lamp of the specified type. Use of a lamp that does not meet the lamp specications for this model could cause a re, damage or shorten the life of this product. • If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this happens, consult your local dealer or a service representative. • Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use. • Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old (used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage. Maintenance Cleaning and replacing the air filter The air lter unit of this projector consists of a lter cover, two kinds of lters, and a lter frame. The new double large lters system is expected to function longer. However, please check and clean it periodically to keep ventilation needed for normal operation of the projector. When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air lter, comply with it as soon as possible. Replace the lters when they are damaged or too soiled. To prepare new lters, make contact with your dealer and tell the following type number. Type number : UX36761 (Filter set) When you replace the lamp, please replace the air lter. An air lter of specied type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector. the projector off, and unplug the power cord. 1. Turn Allow the projector to sufciently cool down. 2 2. Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the lter cover. 3. Pick and pull up the lter cover knobs to take it off. a vacuum cleaner for the lter vent of the 4. Use projector. the ne meshed lter out while holding the 5. Take lter cover. It is recommended to leave the coarse meshed lter in the lter cover as it is. Filter cover 3 Filter cover knobs 4 a vacuum cleaner on both sides of the ne 6. Use meshed lter while holding it so it will not be sucked in. Use a vacuum cleaner for the inside of the lter cover to clean up the coarse meshed lter. If the lters are damaged or heavily soiled, replace them with new ones. the ne meshed lter on the coarse meshed 7. Put one, turning its stitched side up. 8. Put the lter unit back into the projector. Intake vent 7 Filter (coarse meshed) Filter (ne meshed) Stitched side (continued on next page) 95 Maintenance Cleaning and replacing the air lter (continued) Turn the projector on and reset the lter time using the FILTER TIME item in 9. the EASY MENU. (1) Press the MENU button to display a menu. (2) Point at the FILTER TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A dialog will appear. (3) Press the ► button to select “OK” on the dialog. It performs resetting the lter time. WARNING ►Before taking care of the air lter, make sure the power cable is not plugged in, then allow the projector to cool sufciently. Taking care of the air lter in a high temperature state of the projector could cause an electric shock, a burn or malfunction to the projector. ►Use only the air lter of the specied type. Do not use the projector without the air lter or the lter cover. It could result in a re or malfunction to the projector. ►Clean the air lter periodically. If the air lter becomes clogged by dust or the like, internal temperatures rise and could cause a re, a burn or malfunction to the projector. NOTE • Please replace the air lter when it is damaged or heavily soiled. • When you replace the projection lamp, please replace the air lter. An air lter of specied type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector. • Please reset the lter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air lter, for a suitable indication about the air lter. • The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW” or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising. 96 Maintenance Other care Inside of the projector In order to ensure the safe use of your projector, please have it cleaned and inspected by your dealer about once every year. Caring for the lens If the lens is awed, soiled or fogged, it could cause deterioration of display quality. Please take care of the lens, being cautious of handling. the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool 1. Turn sufciently. making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe the lens 2. After with a commercially available lens-cleaning wipe. Do not touch the lens directly with your hand. Caring for the cabinet and remote control Incorrect care could have adverse inuence such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc. the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool 1. Turn sufciently. making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe with gauze 2. After or a soft cloth. If the projector is extremely dirty, dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner diluted in water, and wipe lightly after wringing well. Then, wipe lightly with a soft, dry cloth. WARNING ►Before caring, make sure the power cord is not plugged in, and then allow the projector to cool sufciently. The care in a high temperature state of the projector could cause a burn and/or malfunction to the projector. ►Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally. Doing is so dangerous. ►Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector. It could result in a re, an electric shock, and/or malfunction to the projector. • Do not put anything containing water, cleaners or chemicals near the projector. • Do not use aerosols or sprays. CAUTION ►Please take right care of the projector according to the following. Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse inuence such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc. ►Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specied in this manual. ►Do not polish or wipe with hard objects. NOTICE ►Do not directly touch the lens surface with hands. 97 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If an abnormal operation should occur, stop using the projector immediately. WARNING ►Never use the projector if abnormal operations such as smoke, Troubleshooting strange odor, excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables, penetration of liquids or foreign matter, etc. should occur. In such cases, immediately disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. After making sure that the smoke or odor has stopped, contact to your dealer or service company. Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector, the following checks and measures are recommended before requesting repair. If this does not resolve the problem, please contact your dealer or service company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied. Related messages When some message appears, check and cope with it according to the following table. Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several minutes, it will be reappeared every time the power is turned on. Message Description There is no input signal. Please conrm the signal input connection, and the status of the signal source. The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B (54). Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port. In this case, you cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function. Otherwise select other port for picture input. 3URMHFWRULVZDLWLQJIRUDQLPDJH¿OH Check the hardware connection, settings on the projector and network-related settings. The computer-Projector network connection might be disconnected. Please re-connect them. The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal is QRWZLWKLQWKHVSHFL¿HGUDQJH Please conrm the specs for your projector or the signal source specs. An improper signal is input. Please conrm the specs for your projector or the signal source specs. (continued on next page) 98 Troubleshooting Related messages (continued) Message Description The internal temperature is rising. Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes. After having conrmed the following items, please turn the power ON again. • Is there blockage of the air passage aperture? • Is the air lter dirty? • Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C? • If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m (5250 feet) or higher, set ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH (57). If the projector is used with a wrong setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside. $QRWHRISUHFDXWLRQZKHQFOHDQLQJWKHDLU¿OWHU Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change the air lter referring to the Cleaning and replacing the DLU¿OWHU section of this manual. After you have cleaned or changed the air lter, please be sure to reset the lter timer (55, 95). The button operation is not available. 99 Troubleshooting Regarding the indicator lamps When operation of the LAMP, TEMP and POWER indicators differs from usual, check and cope with it according to the following table. POWER LAMP TEMP Description indicator indicator indicator Turned Turned The projector is in a standby state. Lighting Please refer to the section “Power on/off”. off off In Orange Blinking In Green Turned off Turned off The projector is warming up. Lighting In Green Turned off Turned off The projector is in an on state. Blinking In Orange Turned off Turned off The projector is cooling down. Blinking In Red (discretionary) (discretionary) Please wait. Ordinary operations may be performed. Please wait. The projector is cooling down. A certain error has been detected. Please wait until POWER indicator nishes blinking, and then perform the proper measure using the item descriptions below. The lamp does not light, and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated. Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red Lighting In Red Turned off Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has sufciently cooled down, please make conrmation of the following items, and then turn the power on again. • Is there blockage of the air passage aperture? • Is the air lter dirty? • Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C? If the same indication is displayed after the remedy, please change the lamp referring to the section Replacing the lamp. 7KHODPSFRYHUKDVQRWEHHQSURSHUO\¿[HG Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red Blinking In Red Turned off Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufciently cooled down, please make conrmation of the attachment state of the lamp cover. After performing any needed maintenance, turn the power on again. If the same indication is displayed after the remedy, please contact your dealer or service company. The cooling fan is not operating. Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red Turned off Blinking In Red (continued on next page) 100 Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has sufciently cooled down, please make conrmation that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan, etc., and then turn the power on again. If the same indication is displayed after the remedy, please contact your dealer or service company. Troubleshooting Regarding the indicator lamps (continued) POWER LAMP TEMP indicator indicator indicator Description There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated. Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red Turned off Lighting In Red Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes. After the projector has sufciently cooled down, please make conrmation of the following items, and then turn the power on again. • Is there blockage of the air passage aperture? • Is the air lter dirty? • Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C? • If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m (5250 feet) or higher, set ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH (57). If the projector is used with a wrong setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside. ,WLVWLPHWRFOHDQWKHDLU¿OWHU Lighting In Green Lighting In Green Blinking In Green for approx. 3 seconds. Simultaneous blinking in Red Alternative blinking in Red Turned off Turned off Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change the air lter referring to the section Cleaning DQGUHSODFLQJWKHDLU¿OWHU. After cleaning or changing the air lter, please be sure to reset the lter timer. After the remedy, reset the power to ON. There is a possibility that the interior portion has become overcooled. Please use the unit within the usage temperature parameters (5°C to 35°C). After the treatment, reset the power to ON. At least 1 Power ON schedule is saved to the projector. Please refer to Schedule Settings in the Network Guide. NOTE • When the interior portion has become overheated, for safety purposes, the projector is automatically shut down, and the indicator lamps may also be turned off. In such a case, disconnect the power cord, and wait at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufciently cooled down, please make conrmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover, and then turn the power on again. If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m (5250 feet) or higher, set ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH (57). Otherwise, set it to NORMAL. 101 Troubleshooting Resetting all settings When it is hard to correct some wrong settings, the FACTORY RESET function of SERVICE item in OPTION menu (62) can reset all settings (except settings such as LANGUAGE, LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME, FILTER MESSAGE, SECURITY and NETWORK) to the factory default. Be sure to set ALTITUDE after resetting all the settings (57). Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect, check and cope with it according to the following table. Phenomenon Power does not come on. Cases not involving a machine defect The electrical power cord is not plugged in. Correctly connect the power cord. 15 The main power source has been interrupted during operation such as by a power outage (blackout), etc. Please disconnect the power plug from the power outlet, and allow the projector to cool down at least 10 minutes, then turn the power on again. 15 Either there is no lamp and/or lamp cover, or either RIWKHVHKDVQRWEHHQSURSHUO\¿[HG Please turn the power off and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet, and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufciently cooled down, please make conrmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover, and then turn the power on again. 93 The signal cables are not correctly connected. Correctly connect the connection cables. Signal source does not correctly work. Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to the manual of the source device. Neither sounds The input changeover settings are mismatched. nor pictures are Select the input signal, and correct the settings. outputted. The BLANK function for pictures and the MUTE function for sounds are working. AV MUTE may be active. Refer to the item “Sound does not come out” and “No pictures are displayed” on the next page to turn off the MUTE and BLANK functions. (continued on next page) 102 Reference page 10 ~ 14 – 21 ~ 23 28, 57, 103 Troubleshooting Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued) Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect The signal cables are not correctly connected. Correctly connect the audio cables. 10 ~ 14 The MUTE function is working. Restore the sound pressing MUTE or VOLUME +/button on the remote control. 21 The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level. Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function or the remote control. Sound does not come out. Reference page 21, 46 The AUDIO SOURCE/SPEAKER setting is not correct. Correctly set the AUDIO SOURCE/SPEAKER in AUDIO menu. 46 The mode selected for HDMI AUDIO is not suitable. Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one for your HDMITM audio device. 46 The Sound button or checkbox is disabled. If you have selected USB TYPE B, remove the check mark from the Sound checkbox in the Options window of "LiveViewer Lite for USB". If you have selected LAN, remove the check mark from the Sound checkbox in the Option menu of "LiveViewer". 92 The lens cover is attached. Remove the lens cover. The signal cables are not correctly connected. Correctly connect the connection cables. The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level. Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu function. The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug and play monitor. Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play No pictures are monitor using another plug and play monitor. displayed. The BLANK screen is displayed. Press BLANK button on the remote control. 4, 20 10 ~ 14 33 10 28 The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B. Select USB DISPLAY for USB TYPE B in OPTION menu to project the picture input to the port. Otherwise select other port for picture input. 54 "Waiting for connection." remains displayed even though the USB TYPE B port is selected. Remove the USB cable and reconnect after a while. 89 (continued on next page) 103 Troubleshooting Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued) Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect The projector does not recognize the USB storage device inserted into USB TYPE A port. Use the REMOVE USB function rst, remove the USB No pictures are storage device, and then insert it into the port again. displayed. Before removing the USB storage device, be sure to use (continued) the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen, which appears when the USB TYPE A port is selected as the input source. Video screen display freezes. The FREEZE function is working. Press FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal. Color settings are not correctly adjusted. Colors have a Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR TEMP, COLOR, TINT and/or COLOR SPACE settings, faded- out appearance, or using the menu functions. Color tone is COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable. poor. Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO, RGB, SMPTE240, REC709 or REC601. Pictures appear dark. Pictures appear blurry. 12, 83 28 34, 39 39 The brightness and/or contrast are adjusted to an extremely low level. Adjust BRIGHTNESS and/or CONTRAST settings to a higher level using the menu function. 33 The projector is operating in Eco mode. Set ECO MODE to NORMAL, and set AUTO ECO MODE to OFF, in the SETUP menu. 44 The lamp is approaching the end of its product lifetime. Replace the lamp. 93, 94 Either the focus and/or horizontal phase settings are not properly adjusted. Adjust the focus using the focus ring, and/or H PHASE using the menu function. 24, 38 The lens is dirty or misty. Clean the lens referring to the section Caring for the lens. (continued on next page) 104 Reference page 97 Troubleshooting Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued) Phenomenon Some kind of image degradation such as ickering or stripes appear on screen. The sound or image is unstable or is output intermittently. The computer connected to the USB TYPE B port of the projector does not start up. Cases not involving a machine defect When the projector is operating in Eco mode, ÀLFNHULQJPD\DSSHDURQVFUHHQ Set ECO MODE to NORMAL, and set AUTO ECO MODE to OFF, in the SETUP menu. 44 The OVER SCAN ratio is too big. Adjust OVER SCAN in the IMAGE menu smaller. 36 Excessive VIDEO NR. Change the setting of VIDEO NR in the INPUT menu. 39 The FRAME LOCK function cannot work on the current input signal. Set FRAME LOCK in the INPUT menu to OFF. 41 When LAN or USB TYPE B port is selected, some parts of the output may be missing due to signal processing delay. Change the signal or use another port. The computer cannot start up in the current KDUGZDUHFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ Disconnect the USB cable from the computer, then reconnect it after starting up the computer. The SAVING function is working. Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu. RS-232C does The COMMUNICATION TYPE for the CONTROL port not work. is set to NETWORK BRIDGE. Select OFF for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu. NETWORK BRIDGE function does not work Network does not work Reference page 22, 46 12 45 59 The NETWORK BRIDGE function is turned off. Select NETWORK BRIDGE for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu. 59 The SAVING function is working. Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu. 45 The same network address is set for both wireless and wired LAN. Change the network address setting for wireless or wired LAN. 63, 68 (continued on next page) 105 Troubleshooting Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued) Phenomenon Schedule function does not work When the projector is connected to wired LAN, it powers off and on as described below. Powers off POWER indicator blinks in orange a few times Goes into standby mode Cases not involving a machine defect Reference page The SAVING function is working. Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu. 45 The internal clock has been reset. Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode or the AC power, the current date and time setting is reset. Check the DATE AND TIME setting for WIRELESS SETUP or WIRED SETUP in the NETWORK menu. 65, 69 Disconnect the LAN cable and check that the projector is working properly. If this phenomenon occurs after connecting to the network, there may be a loop between two Ethernet switching hubs within the network, as explained below. - There are two or more Ethernet switching hubs in a network. - Two of the hubs are doubly connected by LAN cables. - This double connection forms a loop between the two hubs. Such a loop may have an adverse effect on the projector as well as the other network devices. Check the network connection and remove the loop by disconnecting the LAN cables such that there is only one connecting cable between two hubs. – NOTE • Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and it does not constitute or imply a machine defect. 106 Specifications Specications Please see the 6SHFL¿FDWLRQV in the User’s Manual (concise) which is a book. End User License Agreement for the Projector Software • Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or/and third party copyrights for each of such software modules. • Be sure to read “End User License Agreement for the Projector Software” which is separated document. 107 Projector CPX10WN/CPX11WN/ CPWX12WN User's Manual (detailed) Network Guide Thank you for purchasing this product. This manual is intended to explain only the network function. For proper use of this product, please refer to this manual and the other manuals for this product. WARNING ►Before using this product, be sure to read all manuals for this product. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference. Features This projector has the network function that brings you the following main features. 9 Network Presentation : allows the projector to project computer images transmitted through a network. (15) 9 Web Control : allows you to monitor and control the projector through a network from a computer. (16) 9 My Image : allows the projector to store up to four still images and project them. (50) 9 Messenger : allows the projector to display text sent from a computer through a network. (51) 9 Network Bridge : allows you to control an external device through the projector from a computer. (52) NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. • The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. • The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent. Trademark acknowledgment • Microsoft®, Internet Explorer®, Windows®, Windows Vista® and Aero® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. • Adobe® and Flash® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. • Pentium® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. • JavaScript® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. • HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. • Crestron®, Crestron e-Control®, e-Control®, Crestron RoomView® and RoomViewTM are trademarks or registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc. in the United States and other countries. • Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in Japan, the United States of America and other countries and areas. 1 All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners. Contents Contents Caution .......................................................................................... 4 1. Connection to the network ...................................................... 5 1.1 System requirements ................................................................................. 5 1.1.1 Required equipment preparation ..................................................................................... 5 1.1.2 Hardware and software requirement for computer .......................................................... 5 1.2 Quick connection ........................................................................................ 6 1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN -. ..................................... 7 1.3.1 Equipments connection .................................................................................................... 7 1.3.2 Network settings .............................................................................................................. 7 1.3.3 “Internet Option” setting ................................................................................................. 10 1.4 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - ............................... 11 1.4.1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection ....................................................................... 11 1.4.2 Wireless LAN connection set up .................................................................................... 12 2. Network Presentation ............................................................. 15 3. Web Control ............................................................................ 16 3.1 Projector Web Control ............................................................................... 17 3.1.1 Logon ............................................................................................................................. 17 3.1.2 Network Information ....................................................................................................... 18 3.1.3 Network Settings ............................................................................................................ 19 3.1.4 Port Settings .................................................................................................................. 22 3.1.5 Mail Settings .................................................................................................................. 24 3.1.6 Alert Settings .................................................................................................................. 25 3.1.7 Schedule Settings .......................................................................................................... 27 3.1.8 Date/Time Settings ......................................................................................................... 30 3.1.9 Security Settings ............................................................................................................ 32 3.1.10 Projector Control .......................................................................................................... 33 3.1.11 Remote Control ............................................................................................................ 39 3.1.12 Projector Status ........................................................................................................... 40 3.1.13 Network Restart ........................................................................................................... 41 3.2 Crestron e-Control® .................................................................................. 42 3.2.1 Main window .................................................................................................................... 43 3.2.2 Tools window ................................................................................................................... 45 3.2.3 Info window ..................................................................................................................... 47 3.2.4 Help Desk window ........................................................................................................... 48 3.2.5 Emergency Alert .............................................................................................................. 49 4. My Image Function ................................................................. 50 5. Messenger Function ............................................................... 51 2 Contents 6. Network Bridge Function ....................................................... 52 6.1 Connecting devices .................................................................................. 6.2 Communication setup ............................................................................... 6.3 Communication port ................................................................................. 6.4 Transmission method ............................................................................... 52 53 53 54 6.4.1 HALF-DUPLEX .............................................................................................................. 54 6.4.2 FULL-DUPLEX ............................................................................................................... 55 7. Other Functions ...................................................................... 56 7.1 E-mail Alerts ............................................................................................. 56 7.2 Projector Management using SNMP ........................................................ 58 7.3 Event Scheduling ..................................................................................... 59 7.4 Command Control via the Network .......................................................... 62 7.5 Crestron RoomView® ................................................................................. 67 8. Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 68 6SHFL¿FDWLRQV ......................................................................... 69 10. Warranty and after-sales service ........................................ 70 3 Caution Caution To use the wireless network function of this projector, the designated USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required. For precautions according to the standards and laws, refer to the documents that come with the adapter. [Restriction on plugging and unplugging the USB wireless adapter] Before you insert or pull out the USB wireless adapter from the projector, turn off the power of the projector and pull out the power cord’s plug from the outlet. Do not touch the USB wireless adapter that is connected to the projector while the projector is receiving AC power. Do not use any extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the projector. [Security precautions when using wireless LAN] It is recommended that security settings, such as SSID and ENCRYPTION, are specied when using wireless LAN communication. If the security settings are not specied, the contents may be intercepted or it may cause unauthorized access to the system. For details on wireless LAN security settings, refer to 3.1 Projector Web Control or NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide. CAUTION ►The optional IEEE802.11b/g/n USB wireless adapter uses the 2.4GHz radio frequency band. You do not need a radio license to use the adapter, but you should be aware of the following: • DO NOT USE NEAR THE FOLLOWING! • Microwave ovens • Industrial, scientic or medical devices • Designated low power radio stations • Premises radio stations Using the USB wireless adapter near the above may cause radio interference, which would result in a decrease in transmission speed or interruption, and even lead to malfunctioning of devices such as pacemakers. • Depending on the location where the USB wireless adapter is used, radio wave interference may occur, which may result in a decrease in transmission speed or interruption in communication.In particular, please be aware that using the USB wireless adapter at locations where there is reinforced steel, other types of metals or concrete is likely to cause radio wave interference. • Available Channels The USB wireless adapter uses the 2.4GHz radio frequency band, but depending on the country or region you are in, the channels that you can use might be limited. Please consult your dealer for information on the usable channels. • Bringing the optional USB wireless adapter out of the country or region you reside in and using it there could lead to a violation of the radio laws of that country or region. 4 1. Connection to the network 1. Connection to the network 1.1 System requirements 1.1.1 Required equipment preparation The following equipments are required to connect the projector to your computer through the network. Ŷ&RPPRQ The projector: 1 unit, Computer : minimum 1 set Ŷ'HSHQGLQJRQKRZ\RXZDQWWRFRQQHFW 1) For the wired connection *1 LAN cable (CAT-5 or greater): 1 piece 2) For the wireless connection *2 - Projector side IEEE802.11b/g/n USB wireless adapter (option : USB-WL-11N) : 1 unit - Computer side IEEE802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN equipment: 1 unit for each *3 *1: The system for using the network function of the projector requires communication environment conforming 100Base-TX or 10Base-T. *2: An access point is required when the wireless LAN connection is used as Infrastructure mode. *3: Depending on the type of wireless network device and computer you are using, the projector may not be able to communicate properly with your computer, even if the computer is equipped with a built-in wireless LAN function. To eliminate communication problems, please use a Wi-Fi certied wireless network device. 1.1.2 Hardware and software requirement for computer To connect your computer to the projector and use the network function of the projector, your computer needs to meet the following requirements. 9 OS: One of the following. Windows ® XP Home Edition /Professional Edition (32 bit version only) Windows Vista ® Home Basic /Home Premium /Business /Ultimate /Enterprise (32 bit version only) Windows ® 7 Starter /Home Basic /Home Premium /Professional /Ultimate / Enterprise (32 bit version only) 9 CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher) 9 Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher * When using the “LiveViewer” it is recommended that the display resolution of your computer is set to 1024 x 768. 9 Memory: 512 MB or higher 9 Hard disk space: 100 MB or higher 9 Web browser: Internet Explorer ® 6.0 or higher 9 &'520GULYH 5 1. Connection to the network 1.1 System requirements (continued) NOTE • The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item is set to SAVING. Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL. (SETUP menu in the Operating Guide) • You can get the latest version of the applications for the network functions of the projector and the latest information for this product from the Hitachi website. (http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia. com). 1.2 Quick connection The “LiveViewer” supports very quick and simple connection to the network. When making use of the network function, it is recommended that you install the "LiveViewer" on your computer. For details, refer to the manual for "LiveViewer". In case you don’t want to use the “LiveViewer” or you cannot use it by some reason, proceed to the manual setting, the item 1.3 for the wired LAN (7) and the item 1.4 for the wireless LAN. (11) 6 1. Connection to the network 1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN This section explains how to set it up manually. 1.3.1 Equipments connection Connect the projector and a computer with a LAN cable. * Before connecting with an existing network, contact the network administrator. Next, check the following computer settings. 1.3.2 Network settings This is the explanation of network connection settings for Windows® 7 and Internet Explorer. 1) Log on to Windows® 7 as administrator authority. Administrator authority is the account, which can access to all functions. 2) Open “Control Panel” from “Start” menu. 3) Open “View network status and tasks” in “Network and Internet”. With the icons in the "Control Panel" window displayed, click "Network and Sharing Center".. 4) Click "Change adapter settings" in the menu on the left side of the "Network and Sharing Center" window. (continued on next page) 7 1. Connection to the network 1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN - (continued) 5) Right-click "Local Area Connection" to open the menu, and select "Properties". 6) Select "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" and click [Properties]. 7) Select "Use the following IP address" and congure the IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway for the computer accordingly. If a DHCP server exists in the network, you can select "Obtain an IP address automatically" and the IP address will be assigned automatically. After setting is complete, click [OK] to close the window. (continued on next page) 8 1. Connection to the network 1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN - (continued) [About IP address] Ŷ6HWWLQJPDQXDOO\ The Network address portion of the IP address setting on your computer must be the same as the setting on the projector.Also, the entire IP address on the computer must not overlap with that of the other devices on the same network, including the projector. For example The projector’s settings are as follows. IP address: 192.168.1.254 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 (Network address: 192.168.1 in this case) Therefore, specify the computer’s IP address as follows. IP address: 192.168.1.xxx (xxx shows decimal number.) Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 (Network address: 192.168.1 in this case) Select from 1 to 254 for “xxx” not duplicating with any other equipments. In this case, since the IP address of the projector is “192.168.1.254”, specify a setting between 1 to 253 for the computer. NOTE • “0.0.0.0” cannot be set to the IP address. • The projector’s IP address can be changed by using the conguration utility via a web browser. (21) • If the projector and the computer exist in the same network (i.e., same network address), you can leave the default gateway eld blank. • When the projector and the computer exist in different networks, the default gateway must be set. Consult to the network administrator in detail. Ŷ6HWWLQJDXWRPDWLFDOO\ When a DHCP server exists in the connected network, it is possible to assign an IP address to the projector and computer automatically. * DHCP is abbreviation for “Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol” and has the function to provide necessary setting for network like IP address from server to client. A server that has DHCP function is called DHCP server. (continued on next page) 9 1. Connection to the network 1.3 Manual network connection setting - Wired LAN - (continued) 1.3.3 “Internet Option” setting 1) Click “Internet Options” in “Network and Sharing Center” window to open “Internet Properties” window. 2) Click “Connections” tab and then click [LAN settings] button to open “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings”. 3) Uncheck all boxes in “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings” window. After setting is complete, click [OK] to close the window. 10 1. Connection to the network 1.4 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN Using the designated USB wireless adapter (option) on the projector enables the projector and computer to communicate in both the Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure modes. This section is intended to explain how to set up wireless LAN connection manually. 1.4.1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection Fig. 1.4.1.a Without an access point communication (Ad-Hoc) Fig. 1.4.1.b With an access point communication (Infrastructure) * Ad-Hoc is one of the wireless LAN communication methods without having access point to communicate. * Infrastructure is one of the wireless LAN communication methods with having access point to communicate. If certain quantities of equipments are used, this mode is efcient. If communicating with existing network, consult to your network administrator. First, insert the USB wireless adapter into the USB TYPE A port. ( Connecting with your devices in the Operating Guide) Then, set up the computer for wireless communication. When the computer comes with a built-in IEEE802.11b/g/n wireless LAN device, enable it and disable other network connections. If a wireless LAN device is not built into the computer, connect an IEEE802.11b/g/n wireless LAN device and install the device driver. For details, refer to the user's guide for the computer and wireless LAN device. 11 1. Connection to the network 1.4 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - (continued) 1.4.2 Wireless LAN connection set up Using wireless LAN utility for Windows® 7 standard. Wireless LAN initial settings for the projector is as follows. Connection Control : Ad-Hoc SSID : wireless Channel :1 Encryption rating : None IP address : 192.168.10.254 * You can change these settings via a web browser on your computer or from the menu of the projector. Refer to the item 3.1.3 Network Settings (20) or NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide. 1) Select "Change adapter settings" from the menu on the left side of the "Network and Sharing Center" window. 2) Right-click "Wireless Network Connection" to open the menu, and select "Properties". 3) Select "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" and click [Properties]. (continued on next page) 12 1. Connection to the network 1.4 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - (continued) 4) Select "Use the following IP address" and congure the IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway for the computer accordingly. After setting is complete, click [OK] to close the window. [About IP address] The Network address portion of the IP address setting on your computer must be the same as the setting on the projector. Also, the entire IP address on the computer must not overlap with that of the other devices on the same network, including the projector. For example The projector’s settings are as follows. IP address: 192.168.10.254 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 (Network address: 192.168.10 in this case) Therefore, specify the computer’s IP address as follows. IP address: 192.168.10.xxx (xxx shows decimal number.) Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 (Network address: 192.168.10 in this case) Select from 1 to 254 for “xxx” not duplicating with any other equipments. In this case, since the IP address of the projector is “192.168.10.254”, specify a setting between 1 to 253 for the computer. NOTE • “0.0.0.0” cannot be set to the IP address. • The projector’s IP address can be changed by using the conguration utility via a web browser. (20) • If the projector and the computer exist in the same network (i.e., same network address), you can leave the default gateway eld blank. • When the projector and the computer exist in different networks, the default gateway must be set. (continued on next page) 13 1. Connection to the network 1.4 Manual network connection setting - Wireless LAN - (continued) 5) Right-click "Wireless Network Connection" to open the menu, and select "Connect / Disconnect". 6) From the connectable wireless networks, select the SSID of the projector (set to "wireless" by default), and click [Connect]. If you have enabled encryption, a window asking for input of the encryption key will be displayed. Input the preset key. 7) After connection is established, "Connected" will appear to the right of SSID. 14 2. Network Presentation 2. Network Presentation The projector can display or play back the computer screen images and audio data that are transmitted through the network. This Network Presentation feature helps you to smoothly make your presentations and conduct conferences. Wireless LAN Wired LAN To use Network Presentation, an exclusive application, "LiveViewer" is required. It can be installed from the bundled application CD. You can also download the latest version and relevant information from the Hitachi website (http://www. hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com). For details of Network Presentation and instructions to install the "LiveViewer", refer to the manual for "LiveViewer". To start the Network Presentation, select the LAN port as the input source on the projector and click the Starting Capture button on the “LiveViewer”. 15 3. Web Control 3. Web Control You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a computer that is connected to the same network. NOTE • Internet Explorer® 6.0 or later is required. • If JavaScript® is disabled in your web browser conguration, you must enable JavaScript® in order to use the projector web pages properly. See the Help les for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript®. • It is recommended that all web browser updates are installed. • If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time, the projector may not be able to process the data correctly. Refer to the following for conguring or controlling the projector via a web browser. Make sure that your computer and the projector is connected via network, and then start Web browser. Enter the projector's IP address into URL input box of the Web browser as the button. example below, and then press the Enter key or Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10: Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser and press the Enter key or click button. If a correct URL is input, and the projector and your computer are connected to the same network correctly, the selection window as shown on the right will be displayed. You can choose to use Projector Web Control or Crestron e-Control® as a tool for controlling the projector. Click one of them. For more details, refer to 3.1 Projector Web Control (17) or 3.2 Crestron e-Control® (42). NOTE • If Crestron e-Control in the Network Settings (21) is set to Disable, the selection window above does not appear, but the Logon window of the Projector Web Control is displayed. • Crestron e-Control® is created using Flash®. You need to install Adobe® Flash® Player on your computer to use Crestron e-Control®. 16 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control 3.1.1 Logon To use the Projector Web Control function, you need to logon with your user name and password. Below are the factory default settings for user name and password. User name Password Administrator <blank> Logon window Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK]. If you logon successfully, the screen below will be displayed. Main menu Click the desired operation or conguration item on the main menu. NOTE • The language used on the Projector Web Control screen is the same as that of the OSD on the projector. If you want to change it, you need to change the OSD language on the projector. (SCREEN menu in the Operating Guide) 17 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.2 Network Information Displays the projector’s current network conguration settings. 'HVFULSWLRQ Item Common Information Projector Name Wireless Information Displays the projector name settings. Displays the current settings of wireless LAN. Mode Displays the mode of wireless LAN communication. '+&3 Displays the DHCP setting. IP Address Displays the IP address. Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask. 'HIDXOW*DWHZD\ Displays the default gateway. '166HUYHU$GGUHVV Displays the DNS server address. MAC Address Displays the MAC address. Ch Displays the channel used for wireless LAN. Encryption Displays the data encryption setting. 66,' Displays the SSID used by the projector. Speed Displays the current wireless LAN transmission speed. Wired Information 18 Displays information common to both wireless and wired LAN. Displays the current wired LAN settings. '+&3 Displays the DHCP setting. IP Address Displays the IP address. Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask. 'HIDXOW*DWHZD\ Displays the default gateway. '166HUYHU$GGUHVV Displays the DNS server address. MAC Address Displays the MAC address. 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.3 Network Settings Displays and congures network settings. Item Common Setup 'HVFULSWLRQ Displays information common to both wireless and wired LAN. Projector Name Congures the name of the projector. The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters. Only alphabets, numbers and following symbols can be used. !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~ and space. Particular projector name is pre-assigned by default. sysLocation (SNMP) Congures the location to be referred to when using SNMP. The length of the sysLocation can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters. Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can be used. sysContact (SNMP) Congures the contact information to be referred to when using SNMP. The length of the sysContact can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters. Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can be used. $0;'' $0;'HYLFH 'LVFRYHU\ Congures the AMX Device Discovery setting to detect the projector from the controllers of AMX connected to the same network. For the details of AMX Device Discovery, visit the AMX web site. URL: http://www.amx.com (as of Dec. 2010) (continued on next page) 19 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Network Settings (continued) 'HVFULSWLRQ Item Wireless Setup Congures the wireless LAN settings. Mode Select "AD-HOC" or "Infrastructure". ,3&RQ¿JXUDWLRQ Congures network settings. '+&321 Enables DHCP. '+&32)) Disables DHCP. IP Address Congures the IP address when DHCP is disabled. Subnet Mask Congures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled. 'HIDXOW Gateway Congures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled. '166HUYHU$GGUHVV Congures the DNS server address. Select from “1” to “11” a channel to use in the AD-HOC mode. NOTE • Depending on the country where you are Ch the channels may vary. In addition, depending on the country or region where you are may be required to use a wireless network card that conrm to the standards in the respective country or region. Encryption Select data encryption method. WEP Key Input the WEP key. Either ASCII characters or hexadecimal numbers can be used during WEP key input. However, you cannot use a combination of both.The length of the key is dened as follows according to the WEP and character formats. Encryption WEP 64bit WEP 128bit HEX numbers 10 characters 26 characters WPA Passphrase Input WPA Passphrase. Available number of input characters is 8 to 63. Only alphabets, numbers and following symbols can be used. !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@ [\]^_`{|}~ and space 66,' Select an SSID from the list. If you require to set your unique SSID, select [Custom], then set your own SSID following the rules below. Maximum number of input characters is 32. Only alphabets, numbers and following symbols can be used. !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~ and space. (continued on next page) 20 ASCII characters 5 characters 13 characters 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Network Settings (continued) 'HVFULSWLRQ Item Wired Setup ,3&RQ¿JXUDWLRQ Congures the wired LAN settings. Congures network settings. '+&321 Enables DHCP. '+&32)) Disables DHCP. IP Address Congures the IP address when DHCP is disabled. Subnet Mask Congures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled. 'HIDXOW Gateway Congures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled. '166HUYHU$GGUHVV Other Setup Crestron e-Control Congures the DNS server address. Congures other network settings. Set whether to or not to use Crestron e-Control®. If you choose Disable, the Logon window of Projector Web Control and not the selection window will be displayed at rst of the Web Control. Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. NOTE • The new conguration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the conguration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking [Network Restart] on the main menu (41). • If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network administrator before setting server addresses. • The WEP Key, WPA passphrase and SSID settings will not be set if the invalid characters are used. • The projector does not allow both wireless and wired LAN to be connected to the same network. Do not set the same network address for both wireless and wired LAN. 21 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.4 Port Settings Displays and congures communication port settings. Item Network Control Port1 (Port:23) Congures command control port 1 (Port:23). Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 23. Authentication Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required for this port. Network Control Port2 (Port:9715) Congures command control port 2 (Port:9715). Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9715. Authentication Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required for this port. PJLink TM Port (Port:4352) Congures the PJLink TM port (Port:4352). Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 4352. Authentication Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required for this port. My Image Port (Port:9716) Congures the My Image Port (Port:9716). Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9716. Authentication Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required for this port. Messenger Port (Port:9719) Congures the Messenger Port (Port:9719). Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9719. Authentication Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required for this port. (continued on next page) 22 'HVFULSWLRQ 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Port Settings (continued) 'HVFULSWLRQ Item SNMP Port Congures the SNMP port. Port open Click the [Enable] check box to use SNMP. Trap address Congures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format. • The address allows not only IP address but also domain name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters. 'RZQORDG0,%¿OH Downloads a MIB le from the projector. Network Bridge Port Port Number Congures the Bridge port number. Input the port number. Except for 41794, 9715, 9716, 9719, 9720, 5900, 5500, 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up. It is set to 9717 as the default setting. Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. NOTE • The new conguration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the conguration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu(41). 23 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.5 Mail Settings Displays and congures e-mail addressing settings. 'HVFULSWLRQ Item Send Mail Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function. Congure the conditions for sending e-mail under the Alert Settings. SMTP Server Address Congures the address of the mail server in IP format. • The address allows not only IP address but also domain name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters. Sender E-mail address Congures the sender e-mail address. The length of the sender e-mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters. Congures the e-mail address of up to ve recipients. You can also specify the [TO] or [CC] for each address. The Recipient E-mail address length of the recipient e-mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters. Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. NOTE • You can conrm whether the mail settings work correctly using the [Send Test Mail] button. Please enable Send mail setting before clicking the [Send Test Mail]. • If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network administrator before setting server addresses. 24 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.6 Alert Settings Displays and congures failure & alert settings. 'HVFULSWLRQ Item Cover Error The lamp cover has not been properly xed. Fan Error The cooling fan is not operating. Lamp Error The lamp does not light, and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated. Temp Error There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated. Air Flow Error The internal temperature is rising. Cold Error There is a possibility that the interior portion has become overcooled. Filter Error Filter time over. Other Error Other error. If displaying this error, please contact your dealer. Schedule Execution Error Schedule Execution error. (27) Lamp Time Alarm Lamp time over Alarm Time setting. Filter Time Alarm Filter time over Alarm Time setting. 7UDQVLWLRQ'HWHFWRU Alarm Transition Detector Alarm. (SECURITY menu in the Operating Guide) Cold Start When the projector is supplied with the power, it works as below. • If the STANDBY MODE is set to the NORMAL:the projector's power status changes from “OFF” to “Standby state”. • If the STANDBY MODE is set to the SAVING:the projector's power status changes from “Standby state” to “ON (lamp is turned on)”. (SETUP menu in the Operating Guide) Authentication Failure The SNMP access is detected from the invalid SNMP community. Refer to Troubleshooting in the Operating Guide for further detailed explanation of Error except Other Error and Schedule Execution Error. 25 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Alert Settings (continued) The Alert Items are shown below. 'HVFULSWLRQ Item Alarm Time Congures the time to alert. (Only Lamp Time Alarm and Filter Time Alarm.) SNMP Trap Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts. Send Mail Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts. (Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.) Mail Subject Congures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent. The length of the subject line can be up to 100 alphanumeric characters. (Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.) Mail Text Congures the text of the e-mail to be sent. The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters, but if you are using some of special characters below the length may be shorter. Special characters " ' : & , % \ and space (Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure.) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. NOTE • The trigger of Filter Error e-mail is depending on the FILTER MESSAGE setting in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu which denes the period until the lter message is displayed on the projector screen. An e-mail will be sent when the usage time of the lter exceeds the time limit that is set. No notication e-mail will be sent if the FILTER MESSAGE is set to TURN OFF. (OPTION menu in the Operating Guide) • Lamp Time Alarm is dened as a threshold for e-mail notication (reminder) of the lamp time. When the lamp hour exceeds this threshold that is congured through the Web page, the e-mail will be sent out. • Filter Time Alarm is dened as a threshold for e-mail notication (reminder) of the lter time. When the lter hour exceeds this threshold that is congured in the Web page, the e-mail will be sent out. 26 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.7 Schedule Settings Displays and congures schedule settings. Item 'HVFULSWLRQ 'DLO\ Congures the daily schedule. Sunday Congures the Sunday schedule. Monday Congures the Monday schedule. Tuesday Congures the Tuesday schedule. Wednesday Congures the Wednesday schedule. Thursday Congures the Thursday schedule. Friday Congures the Friday schedule. Saturday Congures the Saturday schedule. 6SHFL¿FGDWH1R Congures the specic date (No.1) schedule. 6SHFL¿FGDWH1R Congures the specic date (No.2) schedule. 6SHFL¿FGDWH1R Congures the specic date (No.3) schedule. 6SHFL¿FGDWH1R Congures the specic date (No.4) schedule. 6SHFL¿FGDWH1R Congures the specic date (No.5) schedule. 27 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Schedule Settings (continued) The schedule settings are shown below. 'HVFULSWLRQ Item Schedule Click the [Enable] check box to enable the schedule. 'DWH0RQWK'D\ Congures the month and date. This item appears only when Specic date (No. 1-5) is selected. Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. The current event settings are displayed on the schedule list. To add additional functions and events, set the following items. Item 'HVFULSWLRQ Time Congures the time to execute commands. Command [Parameter] Congures the commands to be executed. Power Congures the parameters for power control. Input Source Congures the parameters for input switching. My Image Messenger Congures the parameters for My Image data display. (50) Congures the parameters for Messenger data display. (51) Slideshow Congures the Start/Stop parameters for the Slideshow. Click the [Register] button to add new commands to the schedule list. Click the >'HOHWH@ button to delete commands from the schedule list. Click the [Reset] button to delete all commands and reset the schedule settings from the schedule list. 28 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Schedule Settings (continued) NOTE • After the projector is moved, check the date and time set for the projector before conguring the schedules. • The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time. • Events “My Image” and “Messenger” will not be executed appropriately but result in “schedule execution error” status in case lamp does not light or/and display data are not stored in the projector at the scheduled event execution time. • Events “Input Source” and “My Image” will not be executed if security feature is enabled and the projector is locked due to the feature. • Certain error state in the projector (such as temperature error, lamp error) will prevent the projector from appropriate execution of scheduled functions/events. • If no USB memory device is inserted to the projector or no image data for display exists at the scheduled event time, a schedule execution error occurs against the scheduled Slideshow event. • When you start the Slideshow, input source will be automatically switched to the USB TYPE A port. • Image les stored in the root directory of the USB memory device will be displayed for the scheduled Slideshow. • Please refer to Troubleshooting in the Operating Guide in case scheduled functions/events are not executed appropriately as you've set. 29 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.8 Date/Time Settings Displays and congures the date and time settings. 'HVFULSWLRQ Item &XUUHQW'DWH Congures the current date in year/month/day format. Current Time Congures the current time in hour:minute:second format. 'D\OLJKW6DYLQJV7LPH Click the [ON] check box to enable daylight savings time and set the following items. Congures the date and time daylight savings time begins. Start Month Congures the month daylight savings time begins (1~12). Week Congures the week of the month daylight savings time begins (First, 2, 3, 4, Last). 'D\ Congures the day of the week daylight savings time begins (Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat). Time hour Congures the hour daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 23). minute Congures the minute daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 59). Congures the date and time daylight savings time ends. End Month Congures the month daylight savings time ends (1 ~ 12). Week Congures the week of the month daylight savings time ends (First, 2, 3, 4, Last). 'D\ Congures the day of the week daylight savings time ends (Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat). Time hour Congures the hour daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 23). minute Congures the minute daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 59). (continued on next page) 30 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Date/Time Settings (continued) 'HVFULSWLRQ Item Time difference Congures the time difference. Set the same time difference as the one set on your computer. If unsure, consult your IT manager. SNTP Click the [ON] check box to retrieve Date and Time information from the SNTP server and set the following items. Congures the SNTP server address in IP format. • The address allows not only IP address but also domain SNTP Server Address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings. The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters. Cycle Congures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time information from the SNTP server (hour:minute). Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. NOTE • The new conguration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the conguration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu(41). • If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network administrator before setting server addresses. • Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode (SETUP menu in the Operating Guide) or the AC power, the current date and time setting is reset. • To enable the SNTP function, the time difference must be set. • The projector will retrieve Date and Time information from the time server and override time settings when SNTP is enabled. • The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time. 31 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.9 Security Settings Displays and congures passwords and other security settings. 'HVFULSWLRQ Item User Account Congures the user name and password. User name Congures the user name. The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Password Congures the password. The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters. Re-enter Password Reenter the above password for verication. Network Control Authentication Password Re-enter Authentication Password SNMP Community name Congures the Authentication password for Network Control Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), PJLink™ Port (Port: 4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716), and Messenger Port (Port: 9719) (22, 23). Congures the Authentication password. The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Reenter the above password for verication. Congures the community name if SNMP is used. Congures the community name. The length of the text can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters. Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. NOTE • The new conguration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the conguration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu(41). • Only numbers ‘0-9’ and alphabet ‘a-z’, ‘A-Z’ can be used. 32 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.10 Projector Control The items shown in the table below can be performed using the Projector Control menu. Select an item with the mouse. Most of the items have a submenu. Refer to the table below for details. Controls the projector. NOTE • The setting value may not match with the actual value if the user changes the value manually. In that case, please refresh the page by clicking the [Refresh] button. Item 'HVFULSWLRQ MAIN POWER INPUT SOURCE 3,&785(02'( BLANK ON/OFF MUTE FREEZE Turns the power on/off. Selects the input source. Selects the picture mode setting. Turns Blank on/off. Turns Mute on/off. Turns Freeze on/off. Controls the magnify setting. MAGNIFY In some input signal sources, it might stop “Magnify” even though it does not reach to maximum setting value. MAGNIFY POSITION V Adjusts the vertical magnify position. MAGNIFY POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal magnify position. TEMPLATE Turns template on/off. MY IMAGE Selects MY IMAGE data. 0<,0$*('(/(7( Deletes MY IMAGE data. (continued on next page) 33 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued) Item PICTURE BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST GAMMA COLOR TEMP COLOR TINT SHARPNESS MYMEMORY SAVE MYMEMORY RECALL IMAGE ASPECT OVER SCAN V POSITION H POSITION H PHASE H SIZE $872$'-867 EXECUTE INPUT PROGRESSIVE 9,'(215 COLOR SPACE 9,'(2)250$7 69,'(2 9,'(2)250$7 9,'(2 +'0,)250$7 +'0,5$1*( COMPUTER IN COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN COMPUTER IN2 FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN1 FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN2 )5$0(/2&.+'0, (continued on next page) 34 'HVFULSWLRQ Adjusts the brightness setting. Adjusts the contrast setting. Selects the gamma setting. Selects the color temperature setting. Adjusts the color setting. Adjusts the tint setting. Adjusts the sharpness setting. Saves the MyMemory data. Recalls the MyMemory data. Selects the aspect setting. Adjusts the over scan setting. Adjusts the vertical position. Adjusts the horizontal position. Adjusts the horizontal phase. Adjusts the horizontal size. Performs the automatic adjustment. Selects the progressive setting. Selects the video noise reduction setting. Selects the color space. Selects the s-video format setting. Selects the video format setting. Selects the HDMITM format setting. Selects the HDMITM range setting. Selects the COMPUTER IN1 input signal type. Selects the COMPUTER IN2 input signal type. Turns the FRAME LOCK-COMPUTER IN1 function on/off. Turns the FRAME LOCK-COMPUTER IN2 function on/off. Turns the FRAME LOCK-HDMI function on/off. 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued) Item SETUP AUTO KEYSTONE EXECUTE KEYSTONE V $872(&202'( (&202'( INSTALLATION 67$1'%<02'( MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN1 MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN2 'HVFULSWLRQ Performs the automatic keystone distortion setting. Adjusts the vertical keystone distortion setting. Turns on/off the automatic eco mode function. Selects the eco mode. Selects the installation status. Selects the standby mode. Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN1 input port is selected. Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN2 input port is selected. Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the LAN input port is MONITOR OUT - LAN selected. MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE A input USB TYPE A port is selected. MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE B input USB TYPE B port is selected. MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the +'0, input port is +'0, selected. MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the 69,'(2 input port is 69,'(2 selected. MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the 9,'(2 input port is 9,'(2 selected. MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT in the standby mode. 67$1'%< (continued on next page) 35 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued) Item $8',2 VOLUME SPEAKER $8',26285&( COMPUTER IN1 $8',26285&( COMPUTER IN2 $8',26285&(/$1 $8',26285&(86% TYPE A $8',26285&(86% TYPE B $8',26285&( +'0, $8',26285&( 69,'(2 $8',26285&( 9,'(2 $8',26285&( $8',228767$1'%< +'0,$8',2 SCREEN LANGUAGE MENU POSITION V MENU POSITION H BLANK START UP MyScreen Lock MESSAGE TEMPLATE &&',63/$< &&02'( C.C. - CHANNEL (continued on next page) 36 'HVFULSWLRQ Adjusts the volume setting. Turns the built-in speaker on/off. Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN1 input port. Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - COMPUTER IN2 input port. Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - LAN input port. Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE A input port. Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - USB TYPE B input port. Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - +'0, input port. Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - 69,'(2 input port. Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE - 9,'(2 input port. Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE in the standby mode. Selects the HDMITM audio setting. Selects the language for the OSD. Adjusts the vertical Menu position. Adjusts the horizontal Menu position. Selects the Blank mode. Selects the start up screen mode. Turns MyScreen lock function on/off. Turns the message function on/off. Selects the template setting. Selects Closed Caption DISPLAY setting. Selects Closed Caption MODE setting. Selects Closed Caption CHANNEL setting. 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued) Item OPTION AUTO SEARCH AUTO KEYSTONE ',5(&732:(521 AUTO POWER OFF USB TYPE B MY BUTTON-1 MY BUTTON-2 ECO (CONTROL PANEL) MY SOURCE 'HVFULSWLRQ Turns the automatic signal search function on/off. Turns the automatic keystone distortion correction function on/off. Turns the direct power on function on/off. Congures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal is detected. Selects the USB TYPE B setting. Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-1 button on the included remote control. Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON-2 button on the included remote control. Assigns the same operation as the ECO button on the control panel. Selects the My Source setting. (continued on next page) 37 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control - Projector Control (continued) The items shown in the table below can be performed using the Projector Control menu. Click the [Quit Presenter Mode]. Item 'HVFULSWLRQ SERVICE Quit Presenter Mode 38 Quit compulsorily from the Presenter mode. 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.11 Remote Control You can use your Web browser to control the projector. The functions on the bundled remote control are assigned to the Web Remote Control screen. • Do not attempt to control the projector with the projector’s remote control and via your Web browser at the same time. It may cause some operational errors in the projector. 'HVFULSWLRQ Item POWER Assigned the same operation as 67$1'%<21 button. COMPUTER Assigned the same operation as COMPUTER button. 9,'(2 Assigned the same operation as 9,'(2 button. BLANK Assigned the same operation as BLANK button. FREEZE Assigned the same operation as FREEZE button. MUTE Assigned the same operation as MUTE button. MENU Assigned the same operation as MENU button. ▲ Assigned the same operation as ▲ button. ▼ Assigned the same operation as ▼ button. ◄ Assigned the same operation as ◄ button. ► Assigned the same operation as ► button. ENTER Assigned the same operation as ENTER button. RESET Assigned the same operation as RESET button. PAGE UP Assigned the same operation as PAGE UP button. 3$*('2:1 Assigned the same operation as 3$*('2:1 button. 6/,'(6+2: Starts the Slideshow. NOTE • The Web Remote Control does not support repeat function that performs an action while holding a button clicked down. • Since the repeat function is not available, click the button repeatedly as many times as you require. • Even if you hold the button clicked down for a while, the Web Remote Control sends your request command one time only. Release the button, then click it again. • When the [POWER] button is pushed, a message window comes up to conrm the operation. To control the power, push [OK], otherwise push [Cancel]. • The >3$*('2:1@ and [PAGE UP] buttons on the Web Remote Control cannot be used as mouse emulation function of the projector. 39 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.12 Projector Status Displays the settings and status of the projector. Item 'HVFULSWLRQ Error Status Displays the current error status Lamp Time Displays the usage time for the current lamp. Filter Time Displays the usage time for the current lter. Power Status Displays the current power status. Input Status Displays the current input signal source. Blank On/Off Displays the current Blank on/off status. Mute Displays the current Mute on/off status. Freeze Displays the current Freeze status. 40 3. Web Control 3.1 Projector Web Control (continued) 3.1.13 Network Restart Restarts the projector’s network connection. Item Restart 'HVFULSWLRQ Restarts the projector’s network connection in order to activate new conguration settings. NOTE • Restarting requires you to re-log on in order to further control or congure the projector via a web browser. Wait 30 seconds or more after clicking the [Restart] button to log on again. 41 3. Web Control 3.2 Crestron e-Control® Tab The Main window as shown above is displayed at rst. However, if you have enabled User Password on the Tools window (46), a dialog prompting you to enter the password as shown on the right will be displayed, and no operation is enabled until you have entered the password. After entering the preset password, the dialog disappears and the Main window will be displayed. As shown below, you can open a window by clicking the corresponding tab at the top right of the window. Tab Log Out Tools Info Contact IT Help User Password dialog 'HVFULSWLRQ Logs out from e-Control®. This tab appears only when User Password of the Tools window is enabled. Opens Tools window (45). Opens Info window (47). Opens Help Desk window (48). NOTE • If Crestron e-Control in the Network Settings (21) is set to Disable, Crestron e-Control® cannot be used to operate the projector. Enable Crestron e-Control and close the web browser. Next, restart the web browser, followed by entering the projector's IP address. • Only English is supported on Crestron e-Control®. • If the connection is terminated, the "Loading..." screen will appear. Check the connection between the projector and the computer, then return or refresh the Web page. 42 3. Web Control 3.2 Crestron e-Control® (continued) 3.2.1 Main window 1 4 2 3 You can operate the basic controls of the projector on this screen. NOTE • If the projector is in the standby mode, only the Power button can be operated. 1 Click a button and operate as follows. Button Power Vol -/ Vol + Mute 'HVFULSWLRQ Turns the power on/off. Adjusts the volume setting. Turns Mute on/off. 2 Sources List You can click a button to switch the input channel. The cursor will move according to the currently selected input port. Button Computer in1 Computer in2 LAN USB Type A USB Type B +'0, S-Video Video 'HVFULSWLRQ Selects input from COMPUTER IN1 port. Selects input from COMPUTER IN2 port. Selects input from LAN port. Selects input from USB TYPE A port. Selects input from USB TYPE B port. Selects input from +'0, port. Selects input from 69,'(2 port. Selects input from 9,'(2 port. 43 3. Web Control 3.2 Crestron e-Control® - Main window (continued) 3 Click a button and operate as follows. To show the hidden buttons, click the ◄ / ► icons at the left and right ends. Button Freeze Contrast Brightness Color Sharpness Magnify Auto Blank 'HVFULSWLRQ Turns Freeze on/off. Adjusts the contrast setting. Adjusts the brightness setting. Adjusts the color setting. Adjusts the sharpness setting. Controls the magnication setting using the [+] / [-] buttons. Use the [▲] [▼] [◄] [►] buttons to move to the area you want to magnify. Performs the automatic adjustment. Turns Blank on/off. 4 Click the button and operate in the same way as the bundled remote control. Button Menu Enter Reset Ÿ ▼ ◄ ► 44 'HVFULSWLRQ Assigned the same operation as MENU button. Assigned the same operation as ENTER button. Assigned the same operation as RESET button. Assigned the same operation as Ÿ button. Assigned the same operation as ▼ button. Assigned the same operation as ◄ button. Assigned the same operation as ► button. 3. Web Control 3.2 Crestron e-Control® (continued) 3.2.2 Tools window 2 1 4 5 3 Congures the settings between the projector and Crestron® control system. Click the [Exit] button to return to the Main window. NOTE • If two-byte characters are used, the input text or numbers cannot be set correctly. • All items on this window cannot be left blank. 1 Crestron Control Congures the settings of Crestron® control system devices. Item IP Address ,3,' Port 'HVFULSWLRQ Congures the IP address of the control system. Congures the IP ID of the control system. Species the port number used for communication by the control system. To apply the settings, click the [Send] button. 2 Projector Congures the network settings of the projector. Item Projector Name Location Assigned To: 'HVFULSWLRQ Congures the name of the projector. The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters. Congures the location name of the projector. You can specify a Location name up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Congures the user name for the projector. You can specify a user name up to 32 alphanumeric characters. The usable symbols are space and the following: !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~ To apply the settings, click the [Send] button. 45 3. Web Control 3.2 Crestron e-Control® - Tools window (continued) 3 Projector (continued) Congures the network settings of the projector. Item '+&3 IP Address 'HVFULSWLRQ Enables DHCP. Congures the IP address when DHCP is disabled. Subnet Mask Congures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled. 'HIDXOW*DWHZD\ '166HUYHU Congures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled. Congures the DNS server address. To apply the settings, click the [Send] button. 4 User Password Congures the User Password. To prompt the entry of User Password before starting e-Control®, select the checkbox. Item New Password &RQ¿UP 'HVFULSWLRQ Congures the password. You can specify a password up to 26 alphanumeric characters. The usable symbols are space and the following: !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~ Reenter the above password for verication. If the password is incorrect, an error message is displayed. To apply the settings, click the [Send] button. 5 Admin Password Congures the Admin Password. To prompt the entry of Admin Password before displaying the Tools window, select the checkbox. Item New Password &RQ¿UP 'HVFULSWLRQ Congures the password. You can specify a password up to 26 alphanumeric characters. The usable symbols are space and the following: !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~ Reenter the above password for verication. If the password is incorrect, an error message is displayed. To apply the settings, click the [Send] button. 46 3. Web Control 3.2 Crestron e-Control® (continued) 3.2.3 Info window 1 2 Displays the settings and status of the projector. Click the [Exit] button to return to the Main window. 1 Projector Information Item Projector Name Location MAC Address Resolution Lamp Hours Assigned To: 'HVFULSWLRQ Displays the projector name settings. Displays the location name of the projector. Displays the wired LAN MAC address of the projector. Displays the resolution and vertical frequency of the signal input selected on the projector. Displays the usage time for the current lamp. Displays the user name for the projector. 2 Projector Status Item 'HVFULSWLRQ Power Status Displays the current power status. Input Source Displays the current input signal source. Picture Mode Displays the current picture mode setting. Installation Displays the current installation setting. Eco Mode Displays the current eco mode setting. Error Status Displays the current error status. NOTE • Projector Name, Location and the user name for Assigned To: may appear truncated if they are too long. 47 3. Web Control 3.2 Crestron e-Control® (continued) 3.2.4 Help Desk window Sends/receives messages to/from the administrator for Crestron RoomView® Express. Button Send 48 'HVFULSWLRQ Sends a message. Check the received message. 3. Web Control 3.2 Crestron e-Control® (continued) 3.2.5 Emergency Alert When the administrator for Crestron RoomView® Express sends out an alert message, it will be displayed on the screen. You can reply to the alert message via a chat format. Input a message in the box below the alert message, and click the [Send] button. NOTE • For details of Emergency Alert, refer to the manual of Crestron RoomView® Express. • The alert message from Crestron RoomView® is displayed on the screen of the projector in a way similar to the real-time text of the Messenger function (51). If another real-time text is currently being displayed, it will be overwritten by the alert message. However, if the priority of the real-time text is set to high, it will not be overwritten by the alert message, and the latter will not appear on the screen of the projector. For details, refer to the manual for the application of the Messenger. 49 4. My Image Function 4. My Image Function The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network. Transfer image data 1 2 3 4 Display image data (ex. ) MY IMAGE transmission requires an exclusive application for your computer. Use the application to transfer the image data. It can be downloaded from the Hitachi web site (http://www.hitachi-america.us/ digitalmedia or http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com). For information on the necessary settings and operations for the computer and projector, refer to the manual for the application. To display the transferred image, select the MY IMAGE item in the NETWORK menu. For more information, please see the description of the MY IMAGE item of the NETWORK menu. (NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide) NOTE • It is possible to allocate the image le up to 4 in the maximum. • Using MY BUTTON that registered MY IMAGE can display transferred image. (OPTION menu in the Operating Guide) • The image le also can be displayed by using schedule function from the web browser. Refer to item 7.3 Event Scheduling (59) in detail. • If you display MY IMAGE data on screen while you are using the USB Display function, the application for the USB Display will be closed. To restart the application, exit the MY IMAGE function, and then the software in the projector, LiveViewerLiteUSB.exe, will run again. (86%'LVSOD\ in the Operating Guide) • If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time, the projector may not be able to process the data correctly. 50 5. Messenger Function 5. Messenger Function The projector can display text data transferred via the network on the screen and play back audio data inside the projector. The text data can be displayed on the screen in two ways that displays the text transferred from the computer on real time, and the other chooses and displays the text data from the ones once stored in the projector. Transfer text data 1 2 3 4 12 Display text data (ex. ) Messenger function requires an exclusive application for your computer. To edit, transfer and display the text data, use the application. You can download it from the Hitachi web site (http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia or http:// www.hitachidigitalmedia.com). For information on the necessary settings and operations for the computer and projector, refer to the manual for the application. NOTE • It is possible to store the text data up to 12 in the maximum. • Using MY BUTTON that registered MESSENGER can turn the displaying messenger text on/off. (OPTION menu in the Operating Guide) • The text le also can be displayed by using schedule function via the web browser. Refer to item 7.3 Event Scheduling (59) for the detail. • If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time, the projector may not be able to process the data correctly. 51 6. Network Bridge Function 6. Network Bridge Function This projector is equipped with the NETWORK BRIDGE function to perform mutual conversion of a network protocol and a serial interface. By making use of the NETWORK BRIDGE function, a computer that is connected to the projector via wireless or wired LAN is able to control an external device via RS-232C communication using the projector as a network terminal. TCP/IP data Protocol change Wired LAN LAN cable Computer Serial data RS-232C RS-232C cable External device Wireless LAN LAN port USB TYPE A port CONTROL port 6.1 Connecting devices 1) Connect the projector’s LAN port to the computer’s LAN port with a LAN cable, or insert the USB wireless adapter into the USB TYPE A port. 2) Connect the projector’s CONTROL port and the device’s RS-232C port with an RS-232C cable, for RS-232C communication. NOTE • Before connecting the devices, read the manuals for the devices to ensure the connection. For RS-232C connection, check the specications of each port and use the suitable cable. (Connection to the ports in the Operating Guide - Technical) 52 6. Network Bridge Function 6.2 Communication setup To congure the setup of the communication using NETWORK BRIDGE for the projector, use items in the COMMUNICATION menu. Open the menu of the projector and select the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu. (OPTION menu > SERVICE > COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide) 1) In the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu, select NETWORK BRIDGE (WIRELESS or WIRED depending on the type of connection you use) for the CONTROL port. 2) Using the SERIAL SETTINGS menu, select the proper baud rate and parity for the CONTROL port, according to the specication of the RS-232C port of the connected device. Item BAUD RATE PARITY Condition 4800bps/9600bps/19200bps/38400bps NONE/ODD/EVEN Data length 8 bit (xed) Start bit 1 bit (xed) Stop bit 1 bit (xed) 3) Using the TRANSMISSION METHOD menu, set up the proper method for the CONTROL port according to your use. NOTE • The OFF is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE as the default setting. • Using the COMMUNICATION menu, set up the communication. Remember that an unsuitable setup could cause malfunction of communication. • When either one of the NETWORK BRIDGE settings is selected in the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu, RS-232C commands cannot be received from the CONTROL port. 6.3 Communication port For the NETWORK BRIDGE function, send the data from the computer to the projector with using the Network Bridge Port that is congured in the Port Settings of web browser. (23) NOTE • Except for 41794, 9715, 9716, 9719, 9720, 5900, 5500, 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up as the Network Bridge Port number. It is set to 9717 as the default setting. 53 6. Network Bridge Function 6.4 Transmission method The transmission method can be selected from the menus, only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE. (OPTION menu > SERVICE > COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide) HALF-DUPLEX FULL-DUPLEX 6.4.1 HALF-DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication, but only one direction, either transmitting or receiving data, is allowed at a time. The method does not allow the projector to receive the data from the computer while waiting for response data from an external device. After the projector receives the response data from an external device or the response limit time is past, the projector can receive the data from the computer. That means that the projector controls transmitting and receiving the data to synchronize the communication. To use the HALF-DUPLEX method, set up the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME following the instructions below. TCP/IP data Computer Protocol change Wired LAN LAN cable Serial data RS-232C RS-232C cable External device Wireless LAN Transmitting data Transmitting data Discarding data Response data Response limit time Response data Transmitting data Using the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME menu, set the waiting time for response data from an external device. (OPTION menu > SERVICE > COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide) OFF 1s 2s 3s ( OFF) 54 6. Network Bridge Function 6.4 Transmission method (continued) NOTE • With using the HALF-DUPLEX method, the projector can send out 254 byte data as maximum at once. • If it is not required to monitor the response data from an external device and the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME is set to OFF, the projector can receive the data from the computer and send it out to an external device continuously. The OFF is selected as the default setting. 6.4.2 FULL-DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication, transmitting and receiving data at the same time, without monitoring response data from an external device. With using this method, the computer and an external device will send the data out of synchronization. If it is required to synchronize them, set the computer to make the synchronization. NOTE • In case that the computer controls to synchronize transmitting and receiving the data, it may not be able to control an external device well depending on the processing status of the projector. 55 7. Other Functions 7. Other Functions 7.1 E-mail Alerts The projector can automatically send an alert message to the specied e-mail addresses when the projector detects a certain condition that is requiring maintenance or detected an error. NOTE • Up to ve e-mail addresses can be specied. • The projector may be not able to send e-mail if the projector suddenly loses power. Mail Settings (24) To use the projector’s e-mail alert function, please congure the following items through a web browser. Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10: 1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser, and select Projector Web Control from the selection window. 2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK]. 3) Click the [Mail Settings] and congure each item. Refer to item 3.1.5 Mail Settings (24) for further information. 4) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. NOTE • Click the [Send Test Mail] button in the [Mail Settings] to conrm that the e-mail settings are correct. The following mail will be delivered to the specied addresses. Subject line :Test Mail Text :Send Test Mail Date Time IP Address MAC Address 56 <Projector name> <Testing date> <Testing time> <Projector IP address> <Projector MAC address> 7. Other Functions 7.1 E-mail Alerts (continued) 5) Click the [Alert Settings] on the main menu to congure the E-mail Alerts settings. 6) Select and congure each alert item. Refer to item 3.1.6 Alert Settings (31) for further information. 7) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. Failure/Warning e-mails are formatted as follows: Subject line : <Mail title> Text : <Mail text> Date Time IP Address MAC Address <Projector name> <Failure/Warning date> <Failure/Warning time> <Projector IP address> <Projector MAC address> 57 7. Other Functions 7.2 Projector Management using SNMP The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) enables to manage the projector information, which is a failure or warning status, from the computer on the network. The SNMP management software will be required on the computer to use this function. NOTE • It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network administrator. • SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor the projector via SNMP. SNMP Settings (23) Congure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP. Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10: 1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser, and select Projector Web Control from the selection window. 2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK]. 3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu. 4) Click the >'RZQORDG0,%¿OH@ to download a MIB le. NOTE • To use the downloaded MIB le, specify the le by your SNMP manager. 5) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SNMP Port. Set the IP address to send the SNMP trap to when a Failure/Warning occurs. NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the SNMP Port conguration settings have been changed. Click the [Network Restart] and congure the following items. 6) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu. 7) Click the [SNMP] and set the community name on the screen that is displayed. NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the Community name has been changed. Click the [Network Restart] and congure the following items. 8) Congure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures/Warnings. Click the [Alert Settings] on the main menu and select the Failure/Warning item to be congured. 9) Click the [Enable] check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures/Warnings. Clear the [Enable] check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required. 10) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. 58 7. Other Functions 7.3 Event Scheduling The scheduling function enables to setup scheduled events including power on / power off. It enables to be “self-management” projector. NOTE • You can schedule the following control events: Power, Input Source, My Image, Messenger, Slideshow. (28) • The power on / off event has the lowest priority among the all events that are dened at the same time. • There are 3 types of Scheduling, 1) daily 2) weekly 3) specic date. (27) • The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1) specic date 2) weekly 3) daily. • Up to ve specic dates are available for scheduled events. Priority is given to those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled for the same date and time (e.g., ‘Specic date No. 1’ has priority over ‘Specic date No. 2’ and so on. • Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events. (30) Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode (SETUP menu in the Operating Guide) or the AC power, the current date and time setting is reset. 59 7. Other Functions 7.3 Event Scheduling(continued) Schedule Settings (27) Schedule settings can be congured from a web browser. Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10: 1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser, and select Projector Web Control from the selection window. 2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK]. 3) Click the [Schedule Settings] on the main menu and select the required schedule item. For example, if you want to perform the command every Sunday, please select the [Sunday]. 4) Click the [Enable] check box to enable scheduling. 5) Enter the date (month/day) for specic date scheduling. 6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. 7) After congure the time, command and parameters, click the [Register] to add the new event. 8) Click the >'HOHWH@ button when you want to delete a schedule. There are three types of scheduling. 1) Daily: Perform the specied operation at a specied time every day. 2) Sunday ~ Saturday: Perform the specied operation at the specied time on a specied day of the week. 3) Specic date: Perform the specied operation on the specied date and time. NOTE • In standby mode, the POWER indicator will ash green for approx. 3 seconds when at least 1 “Power ON” schedule is saved. • When the schedule function is used, the power cord must be connected to the projector and the outlet. The schedule function does not work when the breaker in a room is tripped. The power indicator will lights orange or green when the projector is receiving AC power. 60 7. Other Functions 7.3 Event Scheduling(continued) Date/Time Settings (30) The Date/Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser. Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10: 1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser, and select Projector Web Control from the selection window. 2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK]. 3) Click the >'DWH7LPH6HWWLQJV@ on the main menu and congure each item. Refer to item 'DWH7LPH6HWWLQJV (30) for further information. 4) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. NOTE • The internal clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time (31). • Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode (SETUP menu in the Operating Guide) or the AC power, the current date and time setting is reset. 61 7. Other Functions 7.4 Command Control via the Network You can congure and control the projector via the network using RS-232C commands. Communication Port The following two ports are assigned for the command control. TCP #23 (Network Control Port1 (Port: 23)) TCP #9715 (Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)) NOTE • Command control is available only via the specied port above. Command Control Settings (22) Congure the following items from a web browser when command control is used. Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10: 1) Enter “http://192.168.1.10/” into the address bar of the web browser, and select Projector Web Control from the selection window. 2) Enter your user name and password, and then click the [OK]. 3) Click the [Port Settings] on the main menu. 4) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port1 (Port: 23) to use TCP #23. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box. 5) Click the [Enable] check box to open Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715) to use TCP #9715. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box. 6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. 62 7. Other Functions 7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued) When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required. (32) 7) Click the [Security Settings] on the main menu. 8) Click the [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password. * See NOTE. 9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. NOTE • The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 (Port: 23), Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715), PJLink™ Port (Port: 4352), My Image Port (Port: 9716) and Messenger Port (Port: 9719). • The new conguration settings are activated after restarting the network connection. When the conguration settings are changed, you must restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by clicking the [Network Restart] on the main menu(41). 63 7. Other Functions 7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued) Command Format Command formats differ among the different communication ports. ● TCP #23 You can use the RS-232C commands without any changes. The reply data format is the same as the RS-232C commands. (RS-232C Communication in the Operating Guide - Technical) However, the following reply will be sent back in the event of authentication failure when authentication is enabled. <Reply in the event of an authentication error> Reply Error code 0x1F 0x04 0x00 ● TCP #9715 6HQG'DWDIRUPDW The following formatting is added to the header (0 x 02), Data length (0 x 0D), Checksum (1 byte) and Connection ID (1 byte) of the RS-232C commands. Header 'DWDOHQJWK RS-232Ccommand Check Sum Connection ,' 0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Header Data length RS-232C command Check Sum Connection ID 64 → 0x02, Fixed → RS-232C commands byte length (0x0D, Fixed) → RS-232C commands that start with 0xBE 0xEF (13 bytes) → This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum. → Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached to the reply data) 7. Other Functions 7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued) Reply Data format The connection ID (the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending data format) is attached to the RS-232C commands reply data. <ACK reply> Reply Connection ,' 0x06 1 byte <NAK reply> Reply Connection ,' 0x15 1 byte <Error reply> Reply Error code Connection ,' 0x1C 2 bytes 1 byte Reply 'DWD Connection ,' 0x1D 2 bytes 1 byte Reply Status code Connection ,' 0x1F 2 bytes 1 byte <Data reply> <Projector busy reply> <Authentication error reply> Reply Authentication Error code 0x1F 0x04 0x00 Connection ,' 1 byte 65 7. Other Functions 7.4 Command Control via the Network (continued) Automatic Connection Break The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established. Authentication The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm. When the projector is using a LAN, a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled. Bind this received 8 bytes and the Authentication Password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send. Following is a sample if the Authentication Password is set to “password” and the random 8 bytes are “a572f60c”. 1) Connect the projector. 2) Receive the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” from the projector. 3) Bind the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” and the Authentication Password “password” and it becomes “a572f60cpassword”. 4) Digest this bind “a572f60cpassword” with MD5 algorithm. It will be “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”. 5) Add this “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” in front of the commands and send the data. Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command. 6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned. NOTE • As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands, the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection. 66 7. Other Functions 7.5 Crestron RoomView® Crestron RoomView® is a multi-user resource management program provided by Crestron Electronics, Inc. It is an application for managing and controlling the projector and other AV devices collectively. For details of Crestron RoomView®, refer to the Crestron® website. URL: http://www.crestron.com The following communication interfaces can be used to manage the entire facility. 1) Crestron RoomView® Express / Crestron RoomView® Server Edition RoomViewTM Express and RoomViewTM Server Edition are software provided by Crestron Electronics, Inc. They are used for managing all the AV devices, and are also able to communicate with the help desk as well as send out alert messages. For details of the software, refer to the following website. URL: http://www.crestron.com/getroomview 2) Crestron e-Control® Crestron e-Control® is a system controller that can be operated via a web browser (42). 67 8. Troubleshooting 8. Troubleshooting Problem Can't communicate Others - Information from the projector to computer is not correct or completed - The projector does not respond 68 Likely Cause Things to Check Reference Page Number Weak radio signal • Bring the computer and projector closer together. • Radio waves won’t go through concrete and metal (steel doors, etc.) – Cannot communicate due to congure wireless / encryption settings. If there is a wireless conguration utility loaded on your computer, check its settings. Please refer the manual of your conguration utility. – The computer and/or projector's network settings are not congured correctly. Check the network configurations of the computer and projector. – The same network address is set for both wireless and wired LAN. Change the network address setting for wireless or wired LAN. <Only for wireless LAN> The USB wireless adapter is not inserted into the projector. Insert the optional USB wireless adapter. – <Only for wireless LAN> There is closely another projector or other that has the same wireless setting. Try changing of SSID and IP Address. 20 Communication between the projector and computer is not Try “NETWORK RESTART” working well. in SERVICE menu under the NETWORK menu. NETWORK Functions of the projector is not working well. 20, 21 In the Operating Guide 9. Specifications 9. Specications Item Specifications Control software Dedicated computer application and Web browser Corresponding protocol TCP/IP, DHCP client and HTTP server Network Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11b/g/n) (Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure modes) Wired LAN(100Base-TX/10Base-T) Security WEP (64/128bit), WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES), SSID Computer application's system requirements OS: Windows® XP Home Windows® XP Professional Windows Vista® Home Basic Windows Vista® Home Premium Windows Vista® Business Windows Vista® Ultimate Windows Vista® Enterprise Windows® 7 Starter Windows® 7 Home Basic Windows® 7 Home Premium Windows® 7 Professional Windows® 7 Ultimate Windows® 7 Enterprise CPU: Pentium 4 (2.8 GHz or higher) Graphic card: 16 bit, XGA or higher Memory: 512 MB or higher Hard disk space: 100 MB or higher Web browser: Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher CD-ROM drive USB wireless adapter Gemtek USB-Link11n 69 10. Warranty and after-sales service 10. Warranty and after-sales service If a problem occurs with the equipment, please read 8. Troubleshooting (68) section rst and review all suggested check points. After that, please contact your dealer or service company, if you still have the problem. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied. 70 Projector CPX10WN/CPX11WN/CPWX12WN User's Manual (detailed) Operating Guide – Technical Example of PC signal Resolution (H x V) H. frequency (kHz) V. frequency (Hz) Rating Signal mode 37.9 85.0 VESA TEXT 720 x 400 640 x 480 31.5 59.9 VESA VGA (60Hz) 640 x 480 37.9 72.8 VESA VGA (72Hz) 640 x 480 37.5 75.0 VESA VGA (75Hz) 640 x 480 43.3 85.0 VESA VGA (85Hz) 800 x 600 35.2 56.3 VESA SVGA (56Hz) 800 x 600 37.9 60.3 VESA SVGA (60Hz) 800 x 600 48.1 72.2 VESA SVGA (72Hz) 800 x 600 46.9 75.0 VESA SVGA (75Hz) 800 x 600 53.7 85.1 VESA SVGA (85Hz) 832 x 624 49.7 74.5 Mac 16” mode 1024 x 768 48.4 60.0 VESA XGA (60Hz) 1024 x 768 56.5 70.1 VESA XGA (70Hz) 1024 x 768 60.0 75.0 VESA XGA (75Hz) 1024 x 768 68.7 85.0 VESA XGA (85Hz) 1152 x 864 67.5 75.0 VESA 1152 x 864 (75Hz) 1280 x 768 47.7 60.0 VESA W-XGA (60Hz) 1280 x 800 49.7 60.0 VESA 1280 x 800 (60Hz) 1280 x 960 60.0 60.0 VESA 1280 x 960 (60Hz) 1280 x 1024 64.0 60.0 VESA SXGA (60Hz) 1280 x 1024 80.0 75.0 VESA SXGA (75Hz) *1 1280 x 1024 91.1 85.0 VESA SXGA (85Hz) *2 1400 x 1050 65.2 60.0 VESA SXGA+ (60Hz) 1440 x 900 55.9 59.9 VESA WXGA+ (60Hz) *3 1680 x 1050 65.3 60.0 VESA WSXGA+ (60Hz) *1 1600 x 1200 75.0 60.0 VESA UXGA (60Hz) *1) Supported except for HDMI input. *2) Only for CPX10WN and CPX11WN. *3) Only for CPWX12WN. NOTE • Be sure to check jack type, signal level, timing and resolution before connecting this projector to a PC. • Some PCs may have multiple display screen modes. Use of some of these modes will not be possible with this projector. • Depending on the input signal, full-size display may not be possible in some cases. Refer to the number of display pixels above. • Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA (1600x1200), the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution before being displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and projector panel are identical. • Automatic adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals. • The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a composite sync or a sync on G. 1 Initial set signals Initial set signals The following signals are used for the initial settings. The signal timing of some PC models may be different. In such case, adjust the items V POSITION and H POSITION in the IMAGE menu. Back porch (B) Front porch (D) Active video (C) Data H. Sync. Sync (A) Back porch (b) Front porch (d) Active video (c) Data V. Sync. Sync (a) Resolution Horizontal signal timing (μs) Vertical signal timing (lines) Signal mode (H x V) (A) (B) (C) (D) (a) (b) (c) (d) 2.0 3.0 20.3 1.0 3 42 400 1 TEXT 720 x 400 640 x 480 3.8 1.9 25.4 0.6 2 33 480 10 VGA (60Hz) 640 x 480 1.3 4.1 20.3 0.8 3 28 480 9 VGA (72Hz) 640 x 480 2.0 3.8 20.3 0.5 3 16 480 1 VGA (75Hz) 640 x 480 1.6 2.2 17.8 1.6 3 25 480 1 VGA (85Hz) 800 x 600 2.0 3.6 22.2 0.7 2 22 600 1 SVGA (56Hz) 800 x 600 3.2 2.2 20.0 1.0 4 23 600 1 SVGA (60Hz) 800 x 600 2.4 1.3 16.0 1.1 6 23 600 37 SVGA (72Hz) 800 x 600 1.6 3.2 16.2 0.3 3 21 600 1 SVGA (75Hz) 800 x 600 1.1 2.7 14.2 0.6 3 27 600 1 SVGA (85Hz) 832 x 624 1.1 3.9 14.5 0.6 3 39 624 1 Mac 16" mode 1024 x 768 2.1 2.5 15.8 0.4 6 29 768 3 XGA (60Hz) 1024 x 768 1.8 1.9 13.7 0.3 6 29 768 3 XGA (70Hz) 1024 x 768 1.2 2.2 13.0 0.2 3 28 768 1 XGA (75Hz) 1024 x 768 1.0 2.2 10.8 0.5 3 36 768 1 XGA (85Hz) 1152 x 864 1.2 2.4 10.7 0.6 3 32 864 1 1152 x 864 (75Hz) 1280 x 768 1.7 2.5 16.0 0.8 3 23 768 1 W-XGA (60Hz) 1280 x 800 1.6 2.4 15.3 0.8 3 24 800 1 W-XGA (60Hz) 1280 x 960 1.0 2.9 11.9 0.9 3 36 960 1 W-XGA (60Hz) 1280 x 1024 1.0 2.3 11.9 0.4 3 38 1024 1 SXGA (60Hz) 1280 x 1024 1.1 1.8 9.5 0.1 3 38 1024 1 SXGA (75Hz) 1280 x 1024 1.0 1.4 8.1 0.4 3 44 1024 1 SXGA (85Hz) 1400 x 1050 1.2 2.0 11.4 0.7 3 33 1050 1 SXGA+ (60Hz) 1440 x 900 1.4 2.2 13.5 0.8 6 25 900 3 WXGA+ (60Hz) 1680 x 1050 1.2 1.9 11.5 0.7 6 30 1050 3 WSXGA+ (60Hz) 1600 x 1200 1.2 1.9 9.9 0.4 3 46 1200 1 UXGA (60Hz) 2 Connection to the ports Connection to the ports NOTICE ►Use the cables with straight plugs, not L-shaped ones, as the input ports of the projector are recessed. HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B A B COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 C S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 CONTROL A COMPUTER IN1, B COMPUTER IN2, C MONITOR OUT D-sub 15pin mini shrink jack <Computer signal> • Video signal: RGB separate, Analog, 0.7Vp-p, 75Ω terminated (positive) • H/V. sync. signal: TTL level (positive/negative) • Composite sync. signal: TTL level <Component video signal> • Video signal: -Y, Analog, 1.0±0.1Vp-p with composite sync, 75Ω terminated -Cb/Pb, Analog, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminated -Cr/Pr, Analog, 0.7±0.1Vp-p 75Ω terminated System: 480i@60, 480p@60, 576i@50, 576p@50, 720p@50/60, 1080i@50/60, 1080p@50/60 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Video Red, Cr/Pr Video Green, Y Video Blue, Cb/Pb (No connection) Ground Ground Red, Ground Cr/Pr Ground Green, Ground Y Ground Blue, Ground Cb/Pb Pin Signal 9 (No connection) 10 Ground 11 (No connection) A : SDA (DDC data), (No connection) 12 B , C : (No connection) 13 14 15 H. sync / Composite sync., (No connection) V. sync., (No connection) A : SCL (DDC clock), (No connection) B , C : (No connection) 3 Connection to the ports (continued) D F HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 LAN AC IN AUDIO IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO E AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN2 CONTROL D S-VIDEO Mini DIN 4pin jack 4 2 3 1 • System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43, PAL (60Hz) Pin Signal 1 Color signal 0.286Vp-p (NTSC, burst), 75Ω terminator Color signal 0.300Vp-p (PAL/SECAM, burst) 75Ω terminator 2 Brightness signal, 1.0Vp-p, 75Ω terminator 3 Ground 4 Ground E VIDEO RCA jack • System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43, PAL (60Hz) • 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator F HDMI 18 16 14 12 10 • Type :HDMITM connector • Audio signal : Linear PCM (Sampling rate; 32/44.1/48 kHz) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 Signal T.M.D.S. Data2 + T.M.D.S. Data2 Shield T.M.D.S. Data2 T.M.D.S. Data1 + T.M.D.S. Data1 Shield T.M.D.S. Data1 T.M.D.S. Data0 + 19 17 15 13 11 Pin Signal Pin 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 T.M.D.S. Data0 Shield T.M.D.S. Data0 T.M.D.S. Clock + T.M.D.S. Clock Shield T.M.D.S. Clock CEC Reserved(N.C. on device) 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 6 7 4 5 2 3 Signal SCL SDA DDC/CEC Ground +5V Power Hot Plug Detect 1 Connection to the ports (continued) G HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A LAN AC IN USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 I H AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 CONTROL G AUDIO IN1, H AUDIO IN2 Ø3.5 stereo mini jack • 200 mVrms 47kΩ terminator I AUDIO OUT Ø3.5 stereo mini jack • 200 mVrms 1kΩ output impedance 5 Connection to the ports (continued) L K HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A M USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 J AUDIO IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN2 CONTROL J CONTROL D-sub 9pin plug • About the details of RS-232C communication, please refer to the next chapter. Pin Signal Pin 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Pin Signal Signal 1 (No connection) 4 (No connection) 7 RTS 2 RD 5 Ground 8 CTS 3 TD 6 (No connection) 9 (No connection) K USB TYPE A USB A type jack Pin L USB TYPE B 4 3 2 1 Signal +5V 1 +5V 2 - Data 2 - Data 3 + Data 3 + Data Ground 4 Ground 1 4 M LAN RJ-45 jack Pin Signal 1 TX+ 2 TX3 RX+ 6 1 Pin Signal 4 5 6 RX- Pin 7 8 - 3 2 1 USB B type jack Pin Signal 4 Signal 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Connection to the ports (continued) To input component video signal to COMPUTER IN ports ex. D-sub plug RCA plugs HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT RCA connectors COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 Y CB/PB CR/PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT CONTROL VCR/DVD/Blu-ray Disc player To input component video signal to the COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 port of the projector, use a RCA to D-sub cable or adapter. For about the pin description of the required cable or adapter, refer to the descriptions about COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 port (3). 7 RS-232C Communication RS-232C Communication When the projector connects to the computer by RS-232C communication, the projector can be controlled with RS-232C commands from the computer. For details of RS-232C commands, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network command table (17). Connection 1. Turn off the projector and the computer. the projector's CONTROL port and the computer's RS-232C port 2. Connect with a RS-232C cable (cross). Use the cable that fullls the specication 3. 4. shown in gure. Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the projector on. Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to OFF. (OPTION menu - SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide) RS-232C CONTROL RS-232C Cable (cross) RS-232C port of the computer 8 7 8 9 5 4 3 6 2 CONTROL port of the projector 9 8 1 CD (1) RD(2) TD (3) DTR (4) GND (5) DSR (6) RTS (7) DTS (8) RI (9) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (1) − (2) RD (3) TD (4) − (5) GND (6) − (7) RTS (8) CTS (9) − RS-232C Communication (continued) Communication settings 1. Protocol 19200bps,8N1 2. Command format ("h" shows hexadecimal) Byte Number 0 1 Command Action 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Header code Packet L H 10 11 12 Data Header Data size CRC ag Action Type Setting code L L L L L H H H H H <SET>Change setting to desired value [(bL)(bH)] by [(eL)(eH)]. (aL) (aH) 01h 00h (bL) (bH) (cL) (cH) <GET>Read projector internal setup value [(bL) (bH)] . (aL) (aH) 02h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h (aL) (aH) 04h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h <DECREMENT> Decrement setup value [(bL)(bH)] by 1. (aL) (aH) 05h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h <EXECUTE> Run a command [(bL)(bH)]. (aL) (aH) 06h 00h (bL) (bH) 00h 00h <INCREMENT> Increment setup value [(bL)(bH)] by 1. BEh EFh 03h 06h 00h [Header code], [Packet], [Data size] Set [BEh, EFh, 03h, 06h, 00h] to byte number 0 ~ 4. >&5&ÀDJ@ For byte number 5, 6, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network command table (17). [Action] Set functional code to byte number 7, 8. <SET> = [01h, 00h], <GET> = [02h, 00h], <INCREMENT> = [04h, 00h] <DECREMENT> = [05h, 00h], <EXECUTE> = [06h, 00h] Refer to the command table above. [Type], [Setting code] For byte number 9 ∼ 12, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network command table (17). 9 RS-232C Communication (continued) 3. Response code / Error code ("h" shows hexadecimal) (1) ACK reply : 06h When the projector receives the Set, Increment, Decrement or Execute command correctly, the projector changes the setting data for the specied item by [Type], and it returns the code. (2) NAK reply : 15h When the projector cannot understand the received command, the projector returns the error code. In such a case, check the sending code and send the same command again. (3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h When the projector cannot execute the received command for any reasons, the projector returns the error code. In such a case, check the sending code and the setting status of the projector. (4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh When the projector receives the GET command correctly, the projector returns the responce code and 2 bytes of data. NOTE • For connecting the projector to your devices, please read the manual for each devices, and connect them correctly with suitable cables. • Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undened command or data. • Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code. • The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON, and when the lamp is lit. Ignore this data. • Commands are not accepted during warm-up. • When the data length is greater than indicated by the data length code, the projector ignore the excess data code. Conversely when the data length is shorter than indicated by the data length code, the projector returns the error code to the computer. 10 Command Control via the Network Command Control via the Network When the projector connects network, the projector can be controlled with RS232C commands from the computer with web browser. For details of RS-232C commands, refer to RS-232C Communication / Network command table (17). NOTE • If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time, the projector may not be able to process the data correctly. Connection 1. Turn off the projector and the computer. you use wired LAN, connect the projector's LAN port to the computer's 2. IfLAN port with a LAN cable. Use the cable that fullls the specication shown in gure. If you use wireless LAN, insert the USB wireless adapter into the projector's USB TYPE A port. Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the projector on. 3. LAN cable (CAT-5 or greater) LAN LAN 11 Command Control via the Network (continued) Communication Port The following two ports are assigned for the command control. TCP #23 TCP #9715 Congure the following items form a web browser when command control is used. Port Settings Port open Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network Control Port1 (Port: 23)] to use TCP #23. Default setting is “Enable”. Authentication Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when authentication is required. Default setting is “Disable”. Port open Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)] to use TCP #9715. Default setting is “Enable”. Authentication Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when authentication is required. Default setting is “Enable”. Network Control Port1 (Port: 23) Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715) When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required. Security Settings Authentication Password Network Control 12 Re-enter Authentication Password Enter the desired authentication password. ConrmThis setting will be the same for [Network Control Port1 (Port: 23)] and [Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)]. Default setting is blank. Command Control via the Network (continued) Command control settings [TCP #23] 1. Command format Same as RS-232C communication, refer to RS-232C Communicaton command format. 2. Response code / Error code ("h" shows hexadecimal) Four of the response / error code used for TCP#23 are the same as RS-232C Communication (1)~(4). One authentication error reply (5) is added. (1) ACK reply : 06h Refer to RS-232C communication (10). (2) NAK reply : 15h Refer to RS-232C communication (10). (3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h Refer to RS-232C communication (10). (4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh Refer to RS-232C communication (10). (5) Authentication error reply : 1Fh + 0400h When authentication error occurred, the projector returns the error code. [TCP #9715] 1. Command format The commands some datum are added to the head and the end of the ones of TCP#9715 are used. Header Data length RS-232C command Check sum Connection ID 0×02 0×0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte [Header] 02, Fixed [Data Length] RS-232C commands byte length (0×0D, Fixed) [RS-232C commands] Refer to RS-232C Communication command format (9). [Check Sum] This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum. [Connection ID] Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached to the reply data). NOTE • Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undened command or data. • Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code. • Commands are not accepted during warm-up. 13 Command Control via the Network (continued) 2. Response code / Error code ("h" shows hexadecimal) The connection ID is attached for the TCP#23's response / error codes are used. The connection ID is same as the sending command format. (1) ACK reply : 06h + ××h (××h : connection ID) (2) NAK reoly : 15h + ××h (3) Error reply : 1Ch + 0000h + ××h (4) Data reply : 1Dh + xxxxh + ××h (5) Authentication error reply : 1Fh + 0400h + ××h (6) Projector busy reply: 1Fh + ××××h + ××h When the projector is too busy to receives the command ,the projector returens the error code. In such a case, check the sending code and send the same command again. Automatic Connection Break The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established. Authentication The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm. When the projector is using a LAN, a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled. Bind this received 8 bytes and the authentication password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send. Following is a sample if the authentication password is set to “password” and the random 8 bytes are “a572f60c”. 1) Select the projector. 2) Receive the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” from the projector. 3) Bind the random 8 bytes “a572f60c” and the authentication password “password” and it becomes “a572f60cpassword”. 4) Digest this bind “a572f60cpassword” with MD5 algorithm. It will be “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”. 5) Add this “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” in front of the commands and send the data. Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command. 6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned. NOTE • As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands, the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection. 14 Network Bridge Communication Network Bridge Communication This projector is equipped with NETWORK BRIDGE function. When the projector connects to the computer by wired or wireles LAN communicaton, an external device that is connected with this projector by RS232C communication can be controlled from the computer as a network terminal. For details, see the 6. Network Bridge function in the Network Guide. NOTE • If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time, the projector may not be able to process the data correctly. Connection use wired LAN, connect the computer's LAN port and the projector's LAN 1. Ifportyouwith a LAN cable. Use the cable that fullls the specication shown in gure. If you use wireless LAN, insert the USB wireless adapter into the projector's LAN port. Connect the projector's CONTROL port and the RS-232C port of the devices that you want to control with a RS-232C cable. Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the projector on. Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to NETWORK BRIDGE. (OPTION menu - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide) 2. 3. 4. LAN LAN cable (CAT-5 or greater) CONTROL LAN RS-232C 15 Network Bridge Communication (continued) Communication settings For communication setting, use the OPTION - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION menu. (OPTION menu - SERVICE - COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide) Item Condition BAUD RATE 4800bps / 9600bps / 19200bps / 38400bps Data length 8 bit (xed) PARITY NONE/ODD/EVEN Start bit 1 bit (xed) Stop bit 1 bit (xed) Transmission method HALF-DUPLEX/FULL-DUPLEX NOTE • For connecting the projector to your devices, please read the manual for each devices, and connect them correctly with suitable cables. • Turn off (the power of ) both the projector and other devices and unplug , beore connecting them. • For details of Transmission method, refer to 6.4 Transmission method in the Network Guide. 16 RS-232C Communication / Network command table RS-232C Communication / Network command table Names Operation Type Set Turn off Turn on Power Get Set Input Source Error Status Get MAGNIFY FREEZE COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 HDMI S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B Get Set Set PICTURE MODE Get Increment Decrement NORMAL FREEZE Get NORMAL CINEMA DYNAMIC BOARD(BLACK) BOARD(GREEN) WHITEBOARD DAYTIME Get BRIGHTNESS BRIGHTNESS Reset CONTRAST CONTRAST Reset Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Execute Header BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 [Example return] 00 00 [Off] BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 [Example return] 00 00 [Normal] 04 00 >7HPSHUURU@ BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 [Example return] 00 00 [Normal] 20 00 [BOARD(BLACK)] BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 BE EF 03 CRC Action 06 00 06 00 06 00 2A D3 BA D2 19 D3 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 [On] 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 02 00 [Cool down] FE D2 01 00 3E D0 01 00 0E D2 01 00 9E D3 01 00 6E D3 01 00 CE D5 01 00 5E D1 01 00 FE D7 01 00 CD D2 02 00 D9 D8 02 00 01 00 02 00 [Cover error] [Fan error] 05 00 07 00 >$LUÀRZHUURU@ >&ROGHUURU@ 06 00 7C D2 02 00 06 00 1A D2 04 00 06 00 CB D3 05 00 06 00 83 D2 01 00 06 00 13 D3 01 00 06 00 B0 D2 02 00 06 00 23 F6 01 00 06 00 B3 F7 01 00 06 00 E3 F4 01 00 06 00 E3 EF 01 00 06 00 73 EE 01 00 06 00 83 EE 01 00 06 00 E3 C7 01 00 06 00 10 F6 02 00 Command Data Type Setting Code 00 60 00 60 00 60 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 20 00 20 00 20 00 20 00 20 00 20 00 20 00 20 00 20 20 60 00 00 04 00 03 00 02 00 01 00 0B 00 06 00 0C 00 00 00 00 00 03 00 [Lamp error] 08 00 >)LOWHUHUURU@ 07 30 00 07 30 00 07 30 00 02 30 00 02 30 01 02 30 00 BA 30 00 BA 30 01 BA 30 04 BA 30 20 BA 30 21 BA 30 22 BA 30 40 BA 30 00 01 00 04 00 10 00 [Cinema] [Dynamic] [Custom] 21 00 22 00 [BOARD(GREEN)] [WHITEBOARD] 06 00 89 D2 02 00 03 20 06 00 EF D2 04 00 03 20 06 00 3E D3 05 00 03 20 06 00 58 D3 06 00 00 70 06 00 FD D3 02 00 04 20 06 00 9B D3 04 00 04 20 06 00 4A D2 05 00 04 20 06 00 A4 D2 06 00 01 70 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 00 [DAY TIME] 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 (continued on next page) 17 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names GAMMA User Gamma Pattern User Gamma Point 1 User Gamma Point 1 Reset User Gamma Point 2 User Gamma Point 2 Reset User Gamma Point 3 User Gamma Point 3 Reset User Gamma Point 4 User Gamma Point 4 Reset User Gamma Point 5 User Gamma Point 5 Reset User Gamma Point 6 User Gamma Point 6 Reset User Gamma Point 7 User Gamma Point 7 Reset Operation Type Set Set DEFAULT-1 CUSTOM-1 DEFAULT-2 CUSTOM-2 DEFAULT-3 CUSTOM-3 DEFAULT-4 CUSTOM-4 DEFAULT-5 CUSTOM-5 DEFAULT-6 CUSTOM-6 Get Off 9 steps gray scale 15 steps gray scale Ramp Get Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Execute (continued on next page) 18 Header BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 CRC 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 07 07 97 97 67 67 F7 F7 C7 C7 57 57 F4 FB 6B 9B 0B C8 08 6E BF 58 F4 92 43 A4 B0 D6 07 E0 4C 2A FB 1C 38 5E 8F 68 C4 A2 73 94 80 E6 37 D0 E9 FD E8 FC E8 FC E9 FD EB FF EA FE F0 FA FB FB FA FA FE FE FF C2 FF FF FE C3 FF FF FE C3 FE FE FF C2 FF FF FE C3 FE FE FF C2 FE FE FF C2 Action 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 01 02 02 04 05 06 02 04 05 06 02 04 05 06 02 04 05 06 02 04 05 06 02 04 05 06 02 04 05 06 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Command Data Type Setting Code A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 80 80 80 80 80 90 90 90 50 91 91 91 51 92 92 92 52 93 93 93 53 94 94 94 54 95 95 95 55 96 96 96 56 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 70 30 30 30 70 30 30 30 70 30 30 30 70 30 30 30 70 30 30 30 70 30 30 30 70 20 10 21 11 22 12 23 13 24 14 25 15 00 00 01 02 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names Operation Type User Gamma Point 8 User Gamma Point 8 Reset COLOR TEMP Set COLOR TEMP GAIN R Get Increment Decrement Execute 1 HIGH 1 CUSTOM 2 MID 2 CUSTOM 3 LOW 3 CUSTOM 4 Hi-BRIGHT-1 4 CUSTOM 5 Hi-BRIGHT-2 5 CUSTOM 6 Hi-BRIGHT-3 6 CUSTOM Get Get Increment Decrement Header BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE CRC EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 7C 1A CB 2C 0B CB 9B 5B 6B AB 3B FB AB 6B 5B 9B C8 34 52 83 FF FF FE C3 F5 F8 F4 F9 F4 F9 F2 FF F3 FE F3 FE F5 F4 F4 F5 Action 02 04 05 06 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 04 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Command Data Type Setting Code 97 97 97 57 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B1 B1 B1 30 30 30 70 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 00 00 00 00 03 13 02 12 01 11 08 18 09 19 0A 1A 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 COLOR TEMP GAIN R Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 10 C6 06 00 46 70 00 00 COLOR TEMP GAIN G Get Increment Decrement BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 70 F4 16 F4 C7 F5 02 00 04 00 05 00 B2 30 B2 30 B2 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 COLOR TEMP GAIN G Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 EC C7 06 00 47 70 00 00 COLOR TEMP GAIN B Get Increment Decrement BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 8C F5 EA F5 3B F4 02 00 04 00 05 00 B3 30 B3 30 B3 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 COLOR TEMP GAIN B Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 F8 C4 06 00 48 70 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET R Get Increment Decrement BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 04 F5 62 F5 B3 F4 02 00 04 00 05 00 B5 30 B5 30 B5 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET R Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 40 C5 06 00 4A 70 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET G Get Increment Decrement BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 40 F5 26 F5 F7 F4 02 00 04 00 05 00 B6 30 B6 30 B6 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET G Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 BC C4 06 00 4B 70 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET B Get Increment Decrement BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 BC F4 DA F4 0B F5 02 00 04 00 05 00 B7 30 B7 30 B7 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET B Reset Execute BE EF 03 06 00 C8 C5 06 00 4C 70 00 00 (continued on next page) 19 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names Operation Type COLOR COLOR Reset TINT TINT Reset SHARPNESS SHARPNESS Reset MY MEMORY Load Set MY MEMORY Save Set ASPECT Set OVER SCAN OVER SCAN Reset V POSITION V POSITION Reset H POSITION H POSITION Reset H PHASE (*) only for CPWX12WN (continued on next page) 20 Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Execute 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4:3 16:9 14:9 16:10 (*) NATIVE NORMAL Get Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Execute Get Increment Decrement Header BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 CRC 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 B5 72 D3 72 02 73 80 D0 49 73 2F 73 FE 72 7C D1 F1 72 97 72 46 73 C4 D0 0E D7 9E D6 6E D6 FE D7 F2 D6 62 D7 92 D7 02 D6 9E D0 0E D1 CE D6 3E D6 5E D7 5E DD AD D0 91 70 F7 70 26 71 EC D9 0D 83 6B 83 BA 82 E0 D2 F1 82 97 82 46 83 1C D3 49 83 2F 83 FE 82 Action 02 04 05 06 02 04 05 06 02 04 05 06 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 04 05 06 02 04 05 06 02 04 05 06 02 04 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Command Data Type Setting Code 02 02 02 0A 03 03 03 0B 01 01 01 09 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 09 09 09 27 00 00 00 02 01 01 01 03 03 03 03 22 22 22 70 22 22 22 70 22 22 22 70 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 22 22 22 70 21 21 21 70 21 21 21 70 21 21 21 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 02 03 00 01 02 03 00 01 09 0A 08 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names Operation Type Get Increment Decrement Execute H SIZE H SIZE Reset AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE PROGRESSIVE VIDEO NR COLOR SPACE S-VIDEO FORMAT C-VIDEO FORMAT HDMI FORMAT HDMI RANGE COMPUTER IN1 Execute Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set OFF TV FILM Get LOW MID HIGH Get AUTO RGB SMPTE240 REC709 REC601 Get AUTO NTSC PAL SECAM NTSC4.43 M-PAL N-PAL Get AUTO NTSC PAL SECAM NTSC4.43 M-PAL N-PAL Get AUTO VIDEO COMPUTER Get AUTO NORMAL ENHANCED Get AUTO SYNC ON G OFF Get Header BE BE BE BE EF EF EF EF 03 03 03 03 06 06 06 06 00 00 00 00 CRC Action B5 D3 02 68 02 04 05 06 82 82 83 D2 00 00 00 00 Command Data Type Setting Code 02 02 02 04 21 21 21 70 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 BE EF 03 06 00 91 D0 06 00 0A 20 00 00 BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 4A 72 DA 73 2A 73 79 72 26 72 D6 72 46 73 85 73 0E 72 9E 73 6E 73 FE 72 CE 70 3D 72 E6 70 86 74 16 75 16 70 26 77 86 71 76 74 75 76 A2 70 C2 74 52 75 52 70 62 77 C2 71 32 74 31 76 BA 77 2A 76 DA 76 89 77 86 D8 16 D9 E6 D9 B5 D8 CE D6 5E D7 0D D6 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 01 01 02 07 07 07 07 06 06 06 06 04 04 04 04 04 04 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 13 13 13 13 22 22 22 22 10 10 10 00 01 02 00 01 02 03 00 00 01 02 03 04 00 0A 04 05 09 02 08 07 00 0A 04 05 09 02 08 07 00 00 01 02 00 00 01 02 00 03 02 00 EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 (continued on next page) 21 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names COMPUTER IN2 Operation Type Set FRAME LOCK – COMPUTER IN1 Set FRAME LOCK – COMPUTER IN2 Set FRAME LOCK – HDMI Set AUTO SYNC ON G OFF Get OFF ON Get OFF ON Get OFF ON Get AUTO KEYSTONE EXECUTE Execute KEYSTONE V KEYSTONE V Reset AUTO ECO MODE ECO MODE INSTALLATION STANDBY MODE Set Set Set Set MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN1 Set MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN2 Set MONITOR OUT S-VIDEO Set MONITOR OUT VIDEO Set Get Increment Decrement Execute OFF ON Get NORMAL ECO INTELLIGENT ECO Get FRONT / DESKTOP REAR / DESKTOP REAR / CEILING FRONT / CEILING Get NORMAL SAVING Get COMPUTER IN1 OFF Get COMPUTER IN2 OFF Get COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 OFF Get COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 OFF Get (continued on next page) 22 Header BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE CRC 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 BE EF 03 06 00 E5 D1 06 00 0D 20 00 00 BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 B9 D3 DF D3 0E D2 08 D0 FB 27 6B 26 C8 27 3B 23 AB 22 FB 2E 08 23 C7 D2 57 D3 A7 D3 37 D2 F4 D2 D6 D2 46 D3 E5 D2 3E F4 CE B5 0D F4 CE F7 FE B4 3D F5 86 F5 46 F7 76 B4 B5 F5 C2 F5 02 F7 32 B4 F1 F5 02 04 05 06 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 02 01 01 02 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 07 07 07 0C 10 10 10 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 B0 B0 B0 B4 B4 B4 B2 B2 B2 B2 B1 B1 B1 B1 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 01 10 00 00 01 02 03 00 00 01 00 00 FF 00 04 FF 00 00 04 FF 00 00 04 FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 32 A2 F1 3B AB 08 0B 9B 38 7F EF 4C D7 D6 D7 C2 C3 C2 C3 C2 C3 C2 C3 C2 01 01 02 01 01 02 01 01 02 01 01 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Command Data Type Setting Code EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Action 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 11 11 50 50 50 54 54 54 53 53 53 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 20 20 20 70 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 60 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 03 02 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names Operation Type MONITOR OUT HDMI Set MONITOR OUT - LAN Set MONITOR OUT - USB TYPE A Set MONITOR OUT - USB TYPE B Set MONITOR OUT STANDBY Set VOLUME COMPUTER IN1 VOLUME COMPUTER IN2 VOLUME - S-VIDEO VOLUME - VIDEO VOLUME - HDMI VOLUME - LAN VOLUME - USB TYPE A VOLUME - USB TYPE B VOLUME AUDIO OUT STANDBY COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 OFF Get COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 OFF Get COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 OFF Get COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 OFF Get COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 OFF Get Get Increment Decrement Get Increment Decrement Get Increment Decrement Get Increment Decrement Get Increment Decrement Get Increment Decrement Get Increment Decrement Get Increment Decrement Get Increment Decrement Header BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE BE EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF EF 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 CRC 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 7A F4 BA F6 8A B5 49 F4 1A F6 DA F4 EA B7 29 F6 B6 F4 76 F6 46 B5 85 F4 6E F7 AE F5 9E B6 5D F7 2A F7 EA F5 DA B6 19 F7 CD CC AB CC 7A CD FD CD 9B CD 4A CC 75 CD 13 CD C2 CC 31 CD 57 CD 86 CC 89 CC EF CC 3E CD E9 CE 8F CE 5E CF 45 CC 23 CC F2 CD 9D CF FB CF 2A CE D9 CF BF CF 6E CE Action 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 02 04 05 02 04 05 02 04 05 02 04 05 02 04 05 02 04 05 02 04 05 02 04 05 02 04 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Command Data Type Setting Code B3 B3 B3 B3 BB BB BB BB B6 B6 B6 B6 BC BC BC BC BF BF BF BF 60 60 60 64 64 64 62 62 62 61 61 61 63 63 63 6B 6B 6B 66 66 66 6C 6C 6C 6F 6F 6F 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 00 00 04 00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 0 4 00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 (continued on next page) 23 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names MUTE SPEAKER Operation Type Set Set AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN1 Set AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN2 Set AUDIO SOURCE HDMI Set AUDIO SOURCE S-VIDEO Set AUDIO SOURCE VIDEO Set AUDIO SOURCE LAN Set AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE A Set AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE B Set Set AUDIO SOURCE AUDIO OUT STANDBY LAN SOUND ENABLE Set OFF ON Get ON OFF Get AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 OFF Get AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 OFF Get OFF AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 AUDIO_HDMI Get AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 OFF Get AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 OFF Get OFF AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 AUDIO_LAN Get OFF AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 Get OFF AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 AUDIO_USB TYPE B Get AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 OFF Get Disable Enable Get (continued on next page) 24 Header BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 CRC Action 46 D3 D6 D2 75 D3 FE D4 6E D5 5D D5 6E DC 9E DC FE DD CD DD 5E DD AE DD CE DC FD DC BA DD 2A DC DA DC 7A C4 89 DD D6 DD 26 DD 46 DC 75 DC 92 DD 62 DD 02 DC 31 DC DA DF 4A DE BA DE 8A D3 E9 DF 76 DD E6 DC 16 DC 45 DD AE DE 3E DF CE DF 0E D2 9D DE 7A DF 8A DF EA DE D9 DE BA F0 2A F1 89 F0 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 Command Data Type Setting Code 02 20 02 20 02 20 1C 20 1C 20 1C 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 34 20 34 20 34 20 34 20 33 20 33 20 33 20 33 20 33 20 32 20 32 20 32 20 32 20 31 20 31 20 31 20 31 20 3B 20 3B 20 3B 20 3B 20 3B 20 36 20 36 20 36 20 36 20 3C 20 3C 20 3C 20 3C 20 3C 20 3F 20 3F 20 3F 20 3F 20 A3 20 A3 20 A3 20 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 20 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 11 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 12 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names USB TYPE B SOUND ENABLE HDMI AUDIO LANGUAGE * MENU POSITION H Operation Type Disable Enable Get 1 2 Get ENGLISH FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ESPAÑOL ITALIANO NORSK NEDERLANDS PORTUGUÊS Set Set Set SVENSKA 3ɍ&&.ɂɃ SUOMI POLSKI TÜRKÇE DANSK ý(6.< MAGYAR 520Æ1Ă SLOVENSKI HRVATSKI ǼȁȁǾȃǿȀǹ /,(789,Ǐ EESTI LATVIEŠU ไทย ﺓﯼﺏﺭﻉﻝﺍ ﺓﻍﻝﻝﺍ ﻯﺱﺭﺍﻑ PORTUGUÊS BRA BAHASA IND TIENG VIET Get Get Increment Decrement MENU POSITION H Reset Execute Header CRC Action Command Data Type Setting Code BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 32 F0 A2 F1 01 F0 AE C6 5E C6 0D C7 F7 D3 67 D2 97 D2 07 D3 37 D1 A7 D0 57 D0 C7 D1 37 D4 A7 D5 37 DE 57 D5 C7 D4 F7 D6 67 D7 97 D7 07 D6 A7 DF 57 DF C7 DE F7 DC 67 DD 97 DD 07 DC F7 D9 67 D8 97 D8 07 D9 37 DB A7 DA 57 DA C7 DB 37 CA C4 D3 04 D7 62 D7 B3 D6 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 02 00 04 00 05 00 A5 20 A5 20 A5 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 05 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 04 00 05 00 06 00 07 00 08 00 09 00 10 00 0A 00 0B 00 0C 00 0D 00 0E 00 0F 00 11 00 12 00 13 00 14 00 15 00 16 00 17 00 18 00 19 00 1A 00 1B 00 1C 00 1D 00 1E 00 1F 00 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 BE EF 03 06 00 DC C6 06 00 43 70 00 00 * Not all of the languages in the table are supported. (continued on next page) 25 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names Operation Type MENU POSITION V Get Increment Decrement MENU POSITION V Reset Execute BLANK BLANK On/Off START UP MyScreen Lock MESSAGE TEMPLATE TEMPLATE On/Off C. C. - DISPLAY C. C. - MODE C. C. - CHANNEL Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set (continued on next page) 26 MyScreen ORIGINAL BLUE WHITE BLACK Get OFF ON Get MyScreen ORIGINAL OFF Get OFF ON Get OFF ON Get TEST PATTERN DOT-LINE1 DOT-LINE2 DOT-LINE3 DOT-LINE4 CIRCLE 1 CIRCLE 2 MAP 1 MAP 2 Get OFF ON Get OFF ON AUTO Get CAPTIONS TEXT Get 1 2 3 4 Get Header BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 CRC Action 40 D7 26 D7 F7 D6 02 00 04 00 05 00 Command Data Type Setting Code 16 30 16 30 16 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 BE EF 03 06 00 A8 C7 06 00 44 70 00 00 BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 FB CA FB E2 CB D3 6B D0 9B D0 08 D3 FB D8 6B D9 C8 D8 CB CB 0B D2 9B D3 38 D2 3B EF AB EE 08 EF 8F D6 1F D7 BC D6 43 D9 D3 D8 23 D8 B3 D9 83 DB 13 DA E3 DA 83 D4 13 D5 70 D9 BF D8 2F D9 8C D8 FA 62 6A 63 9A 63 C9 62 06 63 96 62 35 63 D2 62 22 62 B2 63 82 61 71 63 01 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 01 01 02 01 01 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 02 01 01 01 02 01 01 02 01 01 01 01 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 20 20 20 04 04 04 04 C0 C0 C0 17 17 17 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 02 02 02 02 02 20 40 03 05 06 00 00 01 00 20 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 10 11 00 00 01 00 00 01 02 00 00 01 00 01 02 03 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names AUTO SEARCH AUTO KEYSTONE DIRECT POWER ON Operation Type Set Set Set AUTO POWER OFF USB TYPE B Set LAMP TIME LAMP TIME Reset FILTER TIME FILTER TIME Reset MY BUTTON-1 Set OFF ON Get OFF ON Get OFF ON Get Get Increment Decrement MOUSE USB DISPLAY Get Get Execute Get Execute COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 HDMI S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B INFORMATION AUTO KEYSTONE MY MEMORY PICTURE MODE FILTER RESET AV MUTE TEMPLATE RESOLUTION ECO MODE MY IMAGE SLIDESHOW MESSENGER Get Header BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 CRC Action B6 D6 26 D7 85 D6 EA D1 7A D0 D9 D1 3B 89 AB 88 08 89 08 86 6E 86 BF 87 FF 23 6F 22 CC 23 C2 FF 58 DC C2 F0 98 C6 3A 33 FA 31 CA 33 5A 32 AA 32 0A 34 9A 30 3A 36 FA 3E 6A 3F 9A 3F 0A 3E 3A 3C AA 38 CA 39 9A 3A 0A 25 5A 3D 9A 2B AA 29 09 33 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 02 00 04 00 05 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 02 00 06 00 02 00 06 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 Command Data Type Setting Code 16 20 16 20 16 20 0F 20 0F 20 0F 20 20 31 20 31 20 31 10 31 10 31 10 31 50 26 50 26 50 26 90 10 30 70 A0 10 40 70 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 36 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 03 00 02 00 01 00 0B 00 06 00 0C 00 10 00 11 00 12 00 13 00 14 00 19 00 1B 00 1E 00 37 00 16 00 22 00 25 00 00 00 (continued on next page) 27 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names MY BUTTON-2 MY BUTTON-ECO Operation Type Set Set COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 HDMI S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B INFORMATION AUTO KEYSTONE MY MEMORY PICTURE MODE FILTER RESET AV MUTE TEMPLATE RESOLUTION ECO MODE MY IMAGE SLIDESHOW MESSENGER Get COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 HDMI S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B INFORMATION AUTO KEYSTONE MY MEMORY PICTURE MODE FILTER RESET AV MUTE TEMPLATE RESOLUTION ECO MODE MY IMAGE SLIDESHOW MESSENGER BLANK FREEZE VOLUME AUTO Get (continued on next page) 28 Header BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 CRC Action C6 32 06 30 36 32 A6 33 56 33 F6 35 66 31 C6 37 06 3F 96 3E 66 3E F6 3F C6 3D 56 39 36 38 66 3B F6 24 A6 3C 66 2A 56 28 F5 32 5A 31 9A 33 AA 31 3A 30 CA 30 6A 36 FA 32 5A 34 9A 3C 0A 3D FA 3D 6A 3C 5A 3E CA 3A AA 3B FA 38 6A 27 3A 3F FA 29 CA 2B 9A 00 0A 01 FA 01 6A 00 69 31 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 Command Data Type Setting Code 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 01 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 08 36 00 00 04 00 03 00 02 00 01 00 0B 00 06 00 0C 00 10 00 11 00 12 00 13 00 14 00 19 00 1B 00 1E 00 37 00 16 00 22 00 25 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 03 00 02 00 01 00 0B 00 06 00 0C 00 10 00 11 00 12 00 13 00 14 00 19 00 1B 00 1E 00 37 00 16 00 22 00 25 00 40 00 41 00 42 00 43 00 00 00 RS-232C Communication / Network command table (continued) Names MY SOURCE Operation Type Set Magnify Position H Magnify Position V MY IMAGE MY IMAGE IMAGE-1 Delete MY IMAGE IMAGE-2 Delete MY IMAGE IMAGE-3 Delete MY IMAGE IMAGE-4 Delete VOLUME - ALL Set COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 HDMI S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B Get Get Increment Decrement Get Increment Decrement OFF IMAGE-1 IMAGE-2 IMAGE-3 IMAGE-4 Get Header CRC Action Command Data Type Setting Code BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 FA 38 3A 3A 0A 38 9A 39 6A 39 CA 3F 5A 3B FA 3D C9 38 C8 D7 AE D7 7F D6 34 D6 52 D6 83 D7 3A C3 AA C2 5A C2 CA C3 FA C1 09 C3 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 02 00 04 00 05 00 02 00 04 00 05 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 20 36 20 36 20 36 20 36 20 36 20 36 20 36 20 36 20 36 10 30 10 30 10 30 11 30 11 30 11 30 00 35 00 35 00 35 00 35 00 35 00 35 00 00 04 00 03 00 02 00 01 00 0B 00 06 00 0C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 04 00 00 00 Execute BE EF 03 06 00 71 C3 06 00 01 35 00 00 Execute BE EF 03 06 00 35 C3 06 00 02 35 00 00 Execute BE EF 03 06 00 C9 C2 06 00 03 35 00 00 Execute BE EF 03 06 00 BD C3 06 00 04 35 00 00 Get Increment Decrement BE EF BE EF BE EF 03 03 03 06 00 06 00 06 00 CD C3 AB C3 7A C2 02 00 04 00 05 00 50 20 50 20 50 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 29 PJLink command PJLink command Commands Control Description POWR Power Contorol POWR ? Power Status inquiry INPT Input Source selection INPT ? Input Source inquiry AVMT AV Mute AVMT ? AV Mute inquiry (continued on next page) 30 Parameter or Response 0 = Standby 1 = Power On 0 = Standby 1 = Power On 2 = Cool Down 11 = COMPUTER IN 1 12 = COMPUTER IN 2 22 = S-VIDEO 23 = VIDEO 31 = HDMI 41 = USB TYPE A 51 = LAN 52 = USB TYPE B 11 = COMPUTER IN 1 12 = COMPUTER IN 2 22 = S-VIDEO 23 = VIDEO 31 = HDMI 41 = USB TYPE A 51 = LAN 52 = USB TYPE B 10 = BLANK off 11 = BLANK on 20 = Mute off 21 = Mute on 30 = AV Mute off 31 = AV Mute on 10 = BLANK off 11 = BLANK on 20 = Mute off 21 = Mute on 30 = AV Mute off 31 = AV Mute on PJLink command (continued) Commands ERST ? Control Description Error Status inquiry LAMP ? Lamp Status inquiry INST ? Input Source List inquiry NAME ? Projector Name inquiry INF1 ? Manufucturer's Name inquiry INF2 ? INFO ? CLSS ? Parameter or Response 1st byte: Refers to Fan error; one of 0 to 2 2nd byte: Refers to Lamp error; one of 0 to 2 3rd byte: Refers to Temptrature error; one of 0 to 2 4th byte: Refers to Cover error; one of 0 to 2 5th byte: Refers to Filter error; one of 0 to 2 6th byte: Refers to Other error; one of 0 to 2 The mearning of 0 to 2 is as given below 0 = Error is not detected; 1 = Warning; 2 = Error 1st number (digits 1 to 5): Lamp Time 2nd number : 0 = Lamp off, 1 = Lamp on 11 12 22 23 31 41 51 52 Responds with the name set in "PROJECTOR NAME" of "NETWORK" HITACHI Your model name, "CPX10WN", "CPX11WN" or "CPWX12WN". Responds with the factory information and so Other Information inquiry on Class Information inquiry 1 Model Name inquiry NOTE • The password used in PJLinkTM is the same as the password set in the Web Brouwser Comtrol. To use PJLinkTM without authentication, do not set any password in Web Browser Control. • For specications of PJLinkTM, see the web site of the Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association. URL: http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/ 31 Projector User's Manual (concise) Thank you for purchasing this projector. Please read through this manual before using this product, in order to use safely and utilize well the product. WARNING ►Before using this product, be sure to read all manuals for this product. After reading them, store them in a safe place for future reference. ►Heed all the warnings and cautions in the manuals or on the product. ►Follow all the instructions in the manuals or on the product. NOTE • In this manual, unless any comments are accompanied, “the manuals” means all the documents provided with this product, and “the product” means this projector and all the accessories came with the projector. Contents First of all ............................................ 2 Connecting power supply ................... 8 Turning on the power.......................... 9 Adjusting the projector's elevator ..... 10 Displaying the picture ....................... 11 Turning off the power........................ 12 Replacing the lamp........................... 13 Cleaning and replacing the air lter .. 15 Using the CD manual ....................... 16 Specications ................................... 17 Troubleshooting - Warranty and after-service ........... 18 Entries and graphical symbols explanation ......2 Important safety instruction ..............................2 Regulatory notices.............................. 3 About Electro-Magnetic Interference ................3 About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment...4 Contents of package........................... 4 Preparing for the remote control......... 5 Arrangement....................................... 6 Connecting with your devices............. 7 Fastening the adapter cover............... 8 1 ENGLISH CPX10WN/CPX11WN/ CPWX12WN First of all Entries and graphical symbols explanation The following entries and graphical symbols are used for the manuals and the product as follows, for safety purpose. Please know their meanings beforehand, and heed them. WARNING This entry warns of a risk of serious personal injury or even death. CAUTION This entry warns of a risk of personal injury or physical damage. NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble. Important safety instruction The followings are important instructions for safely using the product. Be sure to follow them always when handling the product. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond normal usage dened in these manuals of this projector. WARNING ►Never use the product in or after an abnormality (ex. giving off smoke, smelling strange, took a liquid or an object inside, broken, etc.) If an abnormality should occur, unplug the projector urgently. ►Situate the product away from children and pets. ►Keep small parts away from children and pets. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment. ►Do not use the product when there is fear of a thunderbolt. ►Unplug the projector from the power outlet if the projector is not used for the time being. ►Do not open or remove any portion of the product, unless the manuals direct it. For internal maintenance, leave it to your dealer or their service personnel. ►Use only the accessories specied or recommended by the manufacturer. ►Do not modify the projector or accessories. ►Do not let any things or any liquids enter to the inside of the product. ►Do not wet the product. ►Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine oil, are used. Oil may harm the product, resulting in malfunction, or falling from the mounted position. ►Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product. - Do not place the product on an unstable place such as the uneven surface or the leaned table. - Do not place the product unstably. Place the projector so that it does not protrude from the surface where the projector is placed on. - Remove all the attachments including the power cord and cables, from the projector when carrying the projector. ►Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector, while the lamp is on. ►Do not approach the lamp cover and the exhaust vents, while the projection lamp is on. Also after the lamp goes out, do not approach them for a while, since too hot. 2 Regulatory notices In the US, and other places where the FCC regulations are applicable Declaration of Conformity Trade name HITACHI Model Number CPX10WN, CPX11WN, CPWX12WN Responsible Party Hitachi America, Ltd. Address 900 Hitachi way, Chula Vista, CA 91914-3556 U.S.A. Telephone Number +1 -800-225-1741 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. - Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS: This equipment complies with the requirements of FCC (Federal Communication Commission) equipment provided that the following conditions are met. Some cables have to be used with the core set. Use the accessory cable or a designated-type cable for the connection. For cables that have a core only at one end, connect the core to the projector. CAUTION: Changes or modications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 3 ENGLISH About Electro-Magnetic Interference In CANADA This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Regulatory notices (continued) About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment The mark is in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE). The mark indicates the requirement NOT to dispose the equipment including any spent or discarded batteries or accumulators as unsorted municipal waste, but use the return and collection systems available. If the batteries or accumulators included with this equipment, display the chemical symbol Hg, Cd, or Pb, then it means that the battery has a heavy metal content of more than 0.0005% Mercury or more than, 0.002% Cadmium, or more than 0.004% Lead. Contents of package Your projector should come with the items shown below. Check that all the items are included. Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing. (1) Remote control with two AA batteries (2) Power cord (3) Computer cable (4) Adapter cover (5) Lens cover (6) User’s manuals (Book x1, CD x1) (7) Security label (8) Application CD (9) Soft case (1) VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON AUTO FREEZE SEARCH 1 BLANK PAGE UP VOLUME 㧗 DOWN OFF KEYSTONE (5) COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA MY BUTTON 2 MUTE MENU POSITION ENTER ESC RESET (6) (2) (7) (3) (8) (4) (9) WARNING ►Keep small parts away from children and pets. Take care not to put in the mouth. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment. NOTE • Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment. Be sure to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use special caution for the lens. • The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted, moved or shaken, since a ap to control the air ow inside of the projector has moved. Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction. 4 Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it. If the remote control starts to malfunction, try to replace the batteries. If you will not use the remote control for long period, remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place. 1 2 3 Holding the hook part of the battery 1. cover, remove it. and insert the two AA batteries 2. Align (HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL 3. ENERGY, Part No.LR6 or R6P) according to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control. Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place. WARNING ►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage, which could result in re, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment. • When replacing the batteries, replace both of the batteries with new batteries of the same type. Do not use a new battery with a used battery. • Be sure to use only the batteries specied. Do not use batteries of different types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one. • Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery. • Keep a battery away from children and pets. • Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery. • Do not place a battery in a re or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place. • If you observe battery leakage, wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery. If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately. • Obey the local laws on disposing the battery. 5 ENGLISH Preparing for the remote control Arrangement Refer to table T-1 or T-2 and gures F-1 and F-2 at the end of this manual to determine the screen size and projection distance (from the projector’s end). The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen. a Screen size (diagonal) b Projection distance (±10%, from the projector's end) c1 , c2 Screen height (±10%) • If the projector is used at an altitude of about 1600 m (5250 feet) or higher, set ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH. Otherwise, set it to NORMAL. If the projector is used with a wrong setting, it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside. WARNING ►Install the projector where you can access the power outlet easily. ►Install the projector in a stable horizontal position. • Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specied by the manufacturer. Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used. • For special installation such as ceiling mounting, be sure to consult your dealer beforehand. Specic mounting accessories and services may be required. • Do not put the projector on its side, front or rear position. • Do not attach nor place anything on the projector unless otherwise specied in the manual. ►Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or ammable things. ►Do not place the projector where any oils, such as cooking or machine oil, are used. ►Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet. CAUTION ►Place the projector in a cool place with sufcient ventilation. • Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other objects such as walls. • Do not stop up, block nor cover the projector's vent holes. • Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic elds, doing so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction. ►Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place. • Do not place the projector near humidiers. NOTICE ►Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector’s remote sensor. ►Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused. ►Check and correct the setting for ALTITUDE of SERVICE in the OPTION menu according to the usage environment. For details, see User’s Manual Operating Guide. 6 Before connecting the projector to a device, consult the manual of the device to conrm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare the required accessories, such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device. Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged. After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off, perform the connection, according to the following instructions. Refer to gures F-3 to F-6 at the end of this manual. For details, see User’s Manual - Operating Guide. Before connecting the projector to a network system, be sure to read User’s Manual - Network Guide too. WARNING ►Use only the appropriate accessories. Otherwise it could cause a re or damage the projector and devices. • Use only the accessories specied or recommended by the projector’s manufacturer. It may be regulated under some standard. • Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories. • Do not use the damaged accessory. Be careful not to damage the accessories. Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out. CAUTION ►For a cable with a core at only one end, connect the end with the core to the projector. That may be required by EMI regulations. ►Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to obtain the consent of the administrator of the network. ►Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive voltage. ►The designated USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required to use the wireless network function of this projector. ►Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector, be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your data. Before you insert or pull out the USB wireless adapter from the projector, turn off the power of the projector and pull out the power cord’s plug from the outlet. Do not touch the USB wireless adapter while the projector is receiving AC power. NOTE • Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in operation, unless that is directed in the manual of the device. • Some input ports are selectable in the use. For details, see User’s Manual Operating Guide. • Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port. • If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port, use a USB extension cable to connect the USB storage device. 7 ENGLISH Connecting with your devices Fastening the adapter cover Use the supplied adapter cover to prevent the USB wireless adapter from coming off easily. the screw (marked with triangle) 1. Loosen on the bottom right of the USB TYPE A 1 port. the tab of the cover into the hole 2. Insert at the upper left of the USB TYPE A port in the direction of the arrow. Align the screw holes on the projector and the cover. Then insert the screw removed from the projector into the hole and tighten the screw. 3 2 3. Tab WARNING ►Keep small parts away from children and pets. Take care not to put in the mouth. Connecting power supply the connector of the power cord into the 1. Put AC IN (AC inlet) of the projector. plug the power cord’s plug into the 2. Firmly outlet. In a couple of seconds after the power supply connection, the POWER indicator will light up in steady orange. Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON function activated, the connection of the power supply make the projector turn on. AC IN Power cord WARNING ►Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as incorrect or faulty connections may result in re and/or electrical shock. • Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand. • Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, consult your dealer to get a new one. Never modify the power cord. • Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power cord. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible. Remove the power cord for complete separation. • Do not distribute the power supply to multiple devices. Doing so may overload the outlet and connectors, loosen the connection, or result in re, electric shock or other accidents. • Connect the ground terminal for the AC inlet of this unit to the ground terminal of the building using an appropriate power cord (bundled). NOTICE ►This product is also designed for IT power systems with a phaseto-phase voltage of 220 to 240 V. 8 Turning on the power cover. Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control. The projection lamp will light up and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in green. When the power is completely on, the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green. ENGLISH Make sure that the power cord is rmly and correctly connected to the 1. projector and the outlet. STANDBY/ON button sure that the POWER indicator is 2. Make POWER indicator steady orange. Then remove the lens 3. VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE SEARCH PAGE UP DOWN OFF KEYSTONE 1 MY BUTTON 2 BLANK VOLUME 㧗 MUTE MENU POSITION ENTER ESC RESET WARNING ►A strong light is emitted when the projector’s power is on. Do not look into the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through any of the projector’s openings. NOTE • Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices. • The projector has the DIRECT POWER ON function, which can make the projector automatically turn on. For more information, please see User’s Manual - Operating Guide. 9 Adjusting the projector's elevator When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to the left or right, use the elevator feet to place the projector horizontally. 12° Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to project at a suitable angle to the screen, elevating the front side of the projector within 12 degrees. This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator knobs. An elevator foot is adjustable while pulling up the elevator knob on the same side as it. Holding the projector, pull the elevator knobs up to loose the elevator feet. 1. 2. Position the front side of the projector to the desired height. 3. Release the elevator knobs in order to lock the elevator feet. making sure that the elevator feet are locked, put the projector down 4. After gently. necessary, the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise 5. Ifadjustments. Hold the projector when twisting the feet. 1 5 To loose an elevator foot, pull up the elevator knob on the same side as it. To nely adjust, twist the foot. CAUTION ►Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the projector, since the projector may drop down. ►Do not tilt the projector other than elevating its front within 12 degrees using the adjuster feet. A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables, or the projector itself. 10 Displaying the picture Activate your signal source. Turn the signal source on, and make it send the signal to the projector. Press the INPUT button on the projector. Each time you press the button, the projector switches its input port in turn. You can also use the remote control to select an input signal. Press the VIDEO button for selecting an input signal from the HDMI, S-VIDEO or VIDEO port, or the COMPUTER button for selecting an INPUT button input signal from the COMPUTER IN1, COMPUTER IN2, LAN, USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port. Use the VOLUME + / VOLUME - buttons to adjust the volume. To have the projector silent, press the MUTE button on the remote control. Press the ASPECT button on the remote control. Each time you press the button, the projector switches the mode for aspect ratio in turn. Use the ZOOM ring to adjust the screen size. Use the FOCUS ring to focus the picture. VIDEO COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA ASPECT MAGNIFY ON AUTO SEARCH FREEZE VOLUME 㧗 DOWN OFF 2. KEYSTONE MY BUTTON 1 BLANK PAGE UP 2 MUTE VOLUME+ button VOLUME- button MUTE button MENU POSITION ENTER ESC 3. VIDEO 4. ASPECT MAGNIFY ON RESET AUTO FREEZE SEARCH PAGE UP DOWN OFF KEYSTONE 1 MY BUTTON 2 COMPUTER button BLANK VOLUME 㧗 ASPECT button MUTE MENU POSITION 5. 6. VIDEO button COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA ENTER ESC RESET ZOOM ring FOCUS ring CAUTION ►If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector's lamp is on, use the BLANK function. (see User’s Manual - Operating Guide) Taking any other action may cause the damage on the projector. NOTE • The ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted. • For the details of how to adjust the picture, please see User’s Manual Operating Guide. 11 ENGLISH 1. Turning off the power the STANDBY/ON button on the 1. Press projector or the remote control. STANDBY/ON button POWER indicator The message “Power off?” will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds. Press the STANDBY/ON button again while the message appears. The projector lamp will go off, and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange. Then the POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp cooling is complete. Attach the lens cover, after the POWER indicator turns in steady orange. Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off. Also, do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on. Such operations might cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp. 2. VIDEO ASPECT MAGNIFY ON COMPUTER MY SOURCE/ DOC.CAMERA AUTO FREEZE SEARCH PAGE UP DOWN OFF KEYSTONE 1 MY BUTTON 2 BLANK VOLUME 㧗 MUTE MENU POSITION ENTER 3. ESC RESET WARNING ►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot. ►Remove the power cord for complete separation. The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible. NOTE • Please power off the projector after any connected devices are powered off. • This projector has the AUTO POWER OFF function that can make the projector turn off automatically. For more information, please see User’s Manual - Operating Guide. • When you attach or remove the lens cover, move it vertically up and down while keeping the knob to the right as illustrated in the gure. 12 A lamp has nite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare a new lamp, make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number. Type number : DT01191 Lamp cover the projector off, and unplug the power cord. 1. Turn Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes. a new lamp. If the projector is mounted on 2. Prepare a ceiling, or if the lamp has broken, also ask the dealer to replace the lamp. In case of replacement by yourself, follow the following procedure. Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the side to remove it. Loosen the 2 screws (marked by arrow) of the lamp, and slowly pick up the lamp by the handle. Never loosen any other screws. Insert the new lamp, and retighten rmly the 2 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous process to lock it in place. 3 3. 4. 5. 5 43 Handle putting the interlocking parts of the lamp 6. While cover and the projector together, slide the lamp cover back in place. Then rmly fasten the screw of 6 the lamp cover. Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu. (1) Press the MENU button to display a menu. (2) Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. (3) Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using the ▼/▲button, then press the ► button. (4) Point at the LAMP TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A dialog will appear. (5) Press the ► button to select “OK” on the dialog. It performs resetting the lamp time. 7. CAUTION ►Do not touch any inner space of the projector, while the lamp is taken out. NOTE • Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp, for a suitable indication about the lamp. 13 ENGLISH Replacing the lamp Replacing the lamp (continued) HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE WARNING ►The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled while hot, or worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, if the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to y into the lamp housing, and for gas containing mercury and dust containing ne particles of glass to escape from the projector’s vent holes. ►About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws. • For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org (in the US). • For product disposal, consult your local government agency or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada). For more information, ask your dealer. Disconnect the plug from the power outlet 14 • If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass could damage the projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling, so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself. • If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does), ventilate the room well, and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine particles that come out from the projector's vent holes, and not to get them into your eyes or mouth. • Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently. Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the lamp. • Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws. • Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from a ceiling. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken. • Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose screws could result in damage or injury. • Use only the lamp of the specified type. Use of a lamp that does not meet the lamp specications for this model could cause a re, damage or shorten the life of this product. • If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this happens, consult your local dealer or a service representative. • Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use. • Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old (used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage. Please check and clean the air lter periodically. When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air lter, comply with it as soon as possible. The air lter has two kinds of lters inside. Replace the lters when they are damaged or too soiled. To prepare the new lters, make contact with your dealer and tell the following type number. Type number : UX36761 (Filter set) 2 When you replace the lamp, please replace the air lter. An air lter of specied type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to sufciently cool down. Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the lter cover. Filter cover 3 Pick and pull up the lter cover knobs to take it off. Use a vacuum cleaner for the lter vent of the projector. Take the ne meshed lter out while holding the ltercover. It is recommended to leave the coarse meshedlter in the lter cover as it is. Use a vacuum cleaner on both sides of the ne meshed lter while holding it so it will not be sucked in. Use a vacuum cleaner for the inside of the lter cover to clean up the coarse meshed lter. If the lters are damaged or heavily soiled, replace them with new ones. Put the ne meshed lter on the coarse meshed one, turning its stitched side up. Put the lter unit back into the projector. Turn the projector on and reset the lter time using the FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU. (1) Press the MENU button to display a menu. (2) Point at the FILTER TIME using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A dialog will appear. (3) Press the ► button to select “OK” on the dialog. It performs resetting the lter time. Filter cover knobs 4 Intake vent 7 Filter (coarse meshed) Filter (ne meshed) Stitched side WARNING ►Before taking care of the air lter, make sure the power cable is not plugged in, then allow the projector to cool sufciently. ►Use only the air lter of the specied type. Do not use the projector without the air lter or the lter cover. It could result in a re or malfunction to the projector. ►Clean the air lter periodically. If the air lter becomes clogged by dust or the like, internal temperatures rise and could cause a re, a burn or malfunction to the projector. NOTE • Please reset the lter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air lter, for a suitable indication about the air lter. • The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW” or turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising. 15 ENGLISH Cleaning and replacing the air filter Using the CD manual The other manuals for this product are written into the included CD-ROM titled “User’s Manual (detailed)”. Before using the CD-ROM, please read the following to ensure the proper use. System requirements The system for using the CD-ROM requires the following. OS:Microsoft® Windows®: Windows® XP, Windows Vista®, Windows®7 or later ® OS:Mac OS® 10.2 or later Macintosh : CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive: Applications: Microsoft® Internet Explorer®6.0 or later Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® 8.0 or later How to use the CD 1. Insert CD into computer’s CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive. Windows®: In a while, Web browser automatically starts. Start up window comes up. (1) Double-click on the “Projectors” icon appeared on the Macintosh®: desktop screen. (2) When “main.html” file is clicked, Web browser will start and Initial window will appear. 2. Click the model name of your projector first, and then click language you want from the displayed list. The User’s manual (detailed) will open. CAUTION ►Only use the CD-ROM in a computer CD/DVD drive. The CD-ROM is designed for computer use only. NEVER INSERT THE CD-ROM INTO A NON-COMPUTER CD/DVD PLAYER! Inserting the CD-ROM into an incompatible CD/DVD drive may produce a loud noise, which in turn MAY RESULT IN EAR AND SPEAKER DAMAGE! • After using CD-ROM, please put it into CD case and keep it. Please keep the CD neither in direct sunlight nor in a high temperature and high humidity environment. NOTE • The information in the CD-ROM is subject to change without notice. Please check our website where you may nd the latest information for this projector. (18) • No responsibility is taken for any obstacle and defect to hardware and software of your computer as a result of the use of the CD-ROM. • All or Any part of the information in the CD-ROM must not be copied, reproduced or republished without notice to our company. 16 Lamp 6SHFL¿FDWLRQ Liquid crystal projector CPX10WN, CPX11WN: 786,432 pixels (1024 horizontal x 768 vertical) CPWX12WN: 1,024,000 pixels (1280 horizontal x 800 vertical) 215 W UHP Speaker 1W Power supply/ Rated current AC 100-120 V: 3.3 A, AC 220-240 V: 1.6 A Item Product name Liquid Crystal Panel Power consumption Temperature range Size Weight (mass) ENGLISH Specifications AC 100-120 V: 320 W, AC 220-240 V: 310 W 5 ~ 35 °C (Operating) 306 (W) x 77 (H) x 221 (D) mm * Not including protruding parts. Refer to gure F-7 at the back of this manual. approx. 2.3 kg Ports COMPUTER IN1 .......................... D-sub 15 pin mini jack x1 COMPUTER IN2 ........................... D-sub 15 pin mini jack x1 HDMI ...................................................... HDMI connector x1 MONITOR OUT ............................. D-sub 15 pin mini jack x1 S-VIDEO ............................................. Mini DIN 4 pin jack x1 VIDEO ............................................................... RCA jack x1 AUDIO IN1 ............................... 3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1 AUDIO IN2 ............................... 3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1 AUDIO OUT .............................3.5 mm (stereo) mini jack x1 USB TYPE A ................................. USB type A connector x1 USB TYPE B ................................. USB type B connector x1 CONTROL .............................................. D-sub 9 pin plug x1 LAN .................................................................. RJ45 jack x1 Optional parts Lamp: DT01191 Filter set: UX36761 Mounting accessory: HAS-X1 (Bracket for ceiling mount) HAS-204L (Fixing adaptor for low ceilings) HAS-304H (Fixing adaptor for high ceilings) Laser remote control: RC-R008 USB wireless adapter: USB-WL-11N * For more information, please consult your dealer. 17 Troubleshooting - Warranty and after-service If an abnormal operation (such as smoke, strange odor or excessive sound) should occur, stop using the projector immediately. Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector, rst refer to “Troubleshooting” of User’s Manual - Operating Guide and Network Guide, and run through the suggested checks. If this does not resolve the problem, please consult your dealer or service company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied. Please check the following web address where you may nd the latest information for this projector. Product information and Manuals : Production information : Direct link to manual download : http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com http://www.hitachiserviceeu.com/support/guides/ userguides.htm NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. • The illustrations in this manual are for illustrative purposes. They may differ slightly from your projector. • The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. • The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent. Trademark acknowledgment • Mac®, Macintosh® and Mac OS® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. • Pentium® is a registered trademark of Intel Corp. • Adobe® and Acrobat®, Reader® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. • Microsoft®, Internet Explorer®, Windows®, Windows NT® and Windows Vista® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. • HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. • Blu-ray Disc TM and Blu-ray TM are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association. All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners. End User License Agreement for the Projector Software • Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or/and third party copyrights for each of such software modules. • Be sure to read “End User License Agreement for the Projector Software” which is separated document. (in the CD) 18 CPX10WN, CPX11WN a Screen size (diagonal) (1024 x 768) (±10%) 4 : 3 screen b c1 Projection distance Screen height min. max. c2 Screen height 16 : 9 screen b c1 Projection distance Screen height min. max. type (inch) m m inch m inch cm inch cm inch m 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 150 200 250 300 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 3.0 3.8 5.1 6.4 7.6 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.6 3.1 3.9 5.2 6.5 7.8 29 39 49 60 70 80 90 101 121 152 203 254 305 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.5 2.8 3.1 3.7 4.6 6.2 7.8 9.3 35 47 60 72 84 97 109 121 146 183 244 305 367 39 15 52 21 65 26 78 31 91 36 105 41 118 46 131 51 157 62 196 77 261 103 327 129 392 154 7 9 11 13 15 17 20 22 26 33 44 54 65 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 17 21 26 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.7 1.9 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.4 4.2 5.6 7.0 8.5 inch m 32 1.0 43 1.3 54 1.7 65 2.0 76 2.3 87 2.7 99 3.0 110 3.4 132 4.0 166 5.1 221 6.8 277 8.5 333 10.2 CPWX12WN T-2 Screen size (diagonal) m 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 150 200 250 300 0.9 1.2 1.6 1.9 2.2 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.8 4.8 6.4 8.0 9.6 inch m 36 1.1 49 1.5 61 1.9 74 2.3 87 2.7 100 3.0 112 3.4 125 3.8 150 4.6 188 5.8 252 7.7 315 9.6 379 11.6 inch cm inch cm inch 38 52 65 79 92 105 119 132 159 199 266 333 400 36 14 49 19 61 24 73 29 85 34 97 38 109 43 122 48 146 57 182 72 243 96 304 120 365 144 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 6 7 9 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 (1280 x 800) (±10%) 16 : 10 screen a b Projection distance Screen height min. max. type (inch) c2 Screen height c Screen height 4 : 3 screen a b Projection distance Screen height min. max. inch cm inch cm inch m 44 59 74 89 105 120 135 150 181 227 303 379 455 38 15 50 20 63 25 75 30 88 34 100 39 113 44 125 49 150 59 188 74 250 98 313 123 375 148 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 19 24 29 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 6 8 9 11 1.0 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.6 4.3 5.4 7.2 9.1 10.9 inch m inch 41 1.3 50 56 1.7 67 70 2.1 84 84 2.6 101 99 3.0 119 113 3.5 136 127 3.9 153 142 4.3 170 170 5.2 205 214 6.5 257 285 8.7 343 357 10.9 429 429 13.1 515 cm c Screen height inch cm inch 43 17 58 23 72 28 87 34 101 40 115 45 130 51 144 57 173 68 216 85 288 114 361 142 433 170 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 10 12 16 20 24 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 6 8 10 19 ENGLISH T-1 F-1 F-2 ・On a horizontal surface ・Suspended from the ceiling F-3 Computer HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT 20 CONTROL COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 F-4 ENGLISH External device Computer Access point USB wireless adapter (optional) HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB storage device USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT AUDIO IN2 CONTROL F-5 HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT HDMI S-VIDEO OUT L R AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT L R AUDIO OUT COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 CONTROL L R AUDIO OUT Y CB/PB CR/PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VCR/DVD/Blu-ray DiscTM player 21 F-6 Speakers (with an amplier) Monitor RGB IN HDMI USB TYPE A DC5V 0.5A USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 S-VIDEO VIDEO LAN AC IN AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT 22 CONTROL COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 ENGLISH F-7 221 AC IN 77 83 306 [unit: mm] 23 NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. • The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. • The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent. REMARQUE • Les informations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent faire l'objet dechangements sans avertissement préalable. • Le fabricant ne prend aucune responsabilité pour les erreurs qui pourraient se trouver dans ce manuel. • La reproduction, la transmission ou l'utilisation de ce document ou de son contenu est interdite sauf autorisation spéciale écrite. HINWEIS • Die Informationen in diesem Handbuch können ohne vorherige Ankündigung geändert werden. • Der Hersteller übernimmt keine Verantwortung für etwaige in diesem Handbuch enthaltene Fehler. • Die Vervielfältigung, Übertragung oder Verwendung dieses Dokuments oder dessen Inhalts ist ohne ausdrückliche schriftliche Genehmigung nicht gestattet. NOTA • La información de este manual puede sufrir modicaciones sin previo aviso. • El fabricante no asume ninguna responsabilidad por los errores que puedan aparecer en este manual. • No está permitida la reproducción, transmisión o utilización de este documento ni de su contenido sin autorización expresa por escrito. NOTA • Le informazioni riportate in questo manuale sono soggette a modica senza preavviso. • Il produttore declina qualsiasi responsabilità per eventuali errori che potrebbero comparire nel presente manuale. • E’ vietata la riproduzione, la trasmissione o l’utilizzo del presente documento o del suo contenuto senza espressa autorizzazione scritta. MERK • Informasjonen i denne håndboken kan endres uten varsel. • Produsenten påtar seg intet ansvar for eventuelle feil som fremkommer i denne håndboken. • Reproduksjon, overføring eller bruk av dette dokumentet eller deler av det, er ikke tillatt uten uttrykt skriftlig tillatelse. OPMERKING • De informatie in deze handleiding kan zonder voorafgaande kennisgeving veranderd worden. • De fabrikant neemt geen enkele verantwoordelijkheid voor de eventuele fouten in deze handleiding. • Reproductie, overdracht of het gebruik van dit document is niet toegestaan, zonder uitdrukkelijke toestemming van de betreffende partij. NOTA • As informações contidas neste manual estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio. • O fabricante não se responsabiliza por quaisquer erros que possam surgir neste manual. • A reprodução, transmissão ou utilização deste documento ou do seu conteúdo não é permitida sem autorização expressa por escrito. ཚኪ๚ၜ!• Ԩກዐሜాڦඹᆶీփঢ়ᇨߢܸ݀ิՎ߸ă• ԨׂڦሰኁܔԨກዐڦሜٱဃփ ඪࢆሴඪă• ࿄ঢ়ሎႹ൩ကްĂገሜࢅ๑ᆩԨກڦևݴईඇևాඹă 꼁ꍱ• 본서에 기재되어 있는 내용은 예고 없이 변경하는 일이 있습니다 .• 본제품의 제조자는 , 본서 에 있어서의 기재 오류에 대해서 일절의 책임도 지지 않습니다 .• 본서 내용의 일부 혹은 전부를 무단 으로 복사하거나 전재하여 사용하는 것을 절대 금합니다 . NOTERA • Informationen i denna bruksanvisning kan komma att ändras utan förvarning. • Tillverkaren påtar sig inget ansvar för eventuella fel i denna bruksanvisning. • Återgivning, översändande eller användning av detta dokument eller dess innehåll är inte tillåten utan uttrycklig skriftligt medgivande. ɉɊɂɆȿɑȺɇɂȿ • Содержание данного руководства может изменяться без предварительного уведомления. • Производитель не несет ответственности за ошибки в данном руководстве. • Воспроизведение, передача и использование данного документа или его содержания запрещено без письменного разрешения. HUOM! • Tämän ohjekirjan tiedot voivat muuttua ilman eri ilmoitusta. • Valmistaja ei ota mitään vastuuta ohjekirjassa mahdollisesti olevista virheistä. • Dokumentin tai sen sisällön jäljentäminen, siirto tai käyttö ei ole sallittua ilmannimenomaista kirjallista valtuutusta. UWAGA • Informacje podane w tym podręczniku mogą ulec zmianie bez uprzedzenia. • Producent nie ponosi odpowiedzialności za ewentualne błędy w podręczniku. • Powielanie, przesyłanie lub inne wykorzystanie tego dokumentu lub jego treści nie jest dozwolone bez wyraźnej pisemnej zgody. Hitachi America, Ltd. Hitachi Europe AB Digital Media Division 900 Hitachi way, Chula Vista CA 91914-3556 USA CANADA Tel: +1 -800-225-1741 ► http://www.hitachi-america.us/digitalmedia Frösundaviks Alle 15 169 29 Solna SWEDEN Sweden Tel: +46 8 562 711 00 Finland Tel: +358 10 8503 085 Norway Tel: +47 9847 3898 Denmark Tel: +46 8 562 711 00 ► http://www.hitachidigitalmedia.com Hitachi Europe Ltd., Digital Media Group Consumer Affairs Department Whitebrook Park, Lower Cookham Road, Maidenhead Berkshire SL6 8YA UNITED KINGDOM Tel: 0844 481 0297 Email: [email protected] Hitachi Australia Pty Ltd. Hitachi Europe S.A.S., Digital Media Group Hitachi (Hong Kong), Ltd. 31 bis rue du 35ème Régiment de l’aviation ZAC DU CHENE, 69500 BRON FRANCE Tel: 043 742 8430 Email: [email protected] Level 3, 82 Waterloo Road North Ryde N.S.W 2113 AUSTRALIA Tel: +61 -2-9888-4100 ► http://www.hitachi.com.au 18/F., Ever Gain Centre, 28 On Muk Street., Shatin, N.T. HONG KONG Tel: +852 -2113-8883 ► http://www.hitachi-hk.com.hk Hitachi Sales (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. Am Seestern 18 40547 Düsseldorf GERMANY Tel: 0211-5283-801 Email: [email protected] Lot 12, Jalan Kamajuan, Bangi Industrial Estate, 43650 Bandar Baru Bangi, Selangor Darul Ehsan MALAYSIA Tel: +60 -3-8911-2670 ► http://www.hitachiconsumer.com.my Hitachi Europe S.A. Hitachi Home Electronics Asia (S) Pte. Ltd. 364, Kifissias Ave. & 1, Delfon Str. 152 33 Chalandri Athens GREECE Tel: 210 6837200 Email: [email protected] 438A Alexandra Road #01-01/02/03 Alexandra Technopark, 119967 SINGAPORE Tel: +65 -6536-2520 ► http://www.hitachiconsumer.com.sg Hitachi Europe S.r.l. 2nd Floor, No.65, Nanking East Road, Section 3, Taipei 104 TAIWAN Tel: +886-2-2516-0500 ► http://www.hsct.com.tw Hitachi Europe GmbH Via T. Gulli, 39 20147 MILANO ITALY Tel: +39 02 487861 Email: [email protected] Hitachi Europe S.A. Gran Via Carles III, 86 Planta 5ª Edificios Trade - Torre Este 08028 Barcelona SPAIN Tel: 0034 934 092 5 50 Email: [email protected] Hitachi Sales Corp. of Taiwan Hitachi Sales (Thailand), Ltd. 994, 996 Soi Thonglor, Sukhumvit 55 Rd., Klongtonnua, Vadhana, Bangkok 10110 THAILAND Tel: +66 -2381-8381-98 ► http://www.hitachi-th.com Hitachi Consumer Electronics Co.,Ltd. 292 Yoshida-cho, Totsuka-ku Yokohama 244-0817 JAPAN Tel: +81-45-415-2625 ► http://www.hitachi.co.jp/proj/
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement